Circuit Breakers with Communication
Capability
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL
MODBUS
System Manual • 07/2011
Low-Voltage Power Distribution and
Electrical Installation Technology
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with
communication capability - Modbus
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
_
_________________
_
SENTRON
Protection devices
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with
communication capability - Modbus
System Manual
07/2011
A5E02126891-02
Introduction and overview
1
General information
2
SENTRON WL
3
SENTRON VL
4
Zone Selective Interlocking
5
Modbus RTU data transfer
6
powerconfig
7
Data library
8
List of abbreviations
A
Legal information
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.
DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.
WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
with a safety alert symbol, indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.
CAUTION
without a safety alert symbol, indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
NOTICE
indicates that an unintended result or situation can occur if the relevant information is not taken into account.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:
WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.
Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Order number: 3ZX1012-0WL10-AC1
Ⓟ 08/2011
Copyright © Siemens AG 2009.
Technical data subject to change
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 3
Table of contents
1 Introduction and overview.......................................................................................................................... 9
1.1 General information .......................................................................................................................9
1.1.1 Structure of the manual..................................................................................................................9
1.1.2 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................9
1.1.3 SENTRON circuit breakers ..........................................................................................................10
1.2 Bus systems.................................................................................................................................12
1.2.1 Modbus RTU................................................................................................................................12
1.2.2 Ethernet........................................................................................................................................13
1.2.3 PROFIBUS DP.............................................................................................................................14
1.2.4 Communication structure of the SENTRON circuit breakers.......................................................17
2 General information ................................................................................................................................. 19
2.1 Other system manuals and literature...........................................................................................19
2.2 Approvals .....................................................................................................................................19
2.3 Standards and approvals .............................................................................................................19
2.4 Orientation aids............................................................................................................................20
2.5 Up-to-the-minute information at all times.....................................................................................20
2.6 Scope...........................................................................................................................................20
3 SENTRON WL......................................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 Introduction and overview ............................................................................................................21
3.1.1 The CubicleBUS ..........................................................................................................................21
3.1.2 Communications capability of electronic trip units (ETU) ............................................................21
3.1.3 Function overview of the overcurrent tripping system .................................................................22
3.1.4 Availability of the data on the CubicleBUS ..................................................................................27
3.1.5 Brief description of SENTRON WL ..............................................................................................29
3.2 COM16 and BSS module.............................................................................................................32
3.2.1 COM16 Modbus RTU module......................................................................................................32
3.2.2 Connection of the COM16 module ..............................................................................................33
3.2.3 Write protection (WriteEnable).....................................................................................................38
3.2.4 Data exchange via the COM16....................................................................................................38
3.2.5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) ......................................................................................................41
3.3 Metering functions........................................................................................................................42
3.3.1 Metering function PLUS...............................................................................................................42
3.3.2 Voltage transformer .....................................................................................................................48
3.3.3 Delay of the threshold warning ....................................................................................................52
3.4 Functions and parameters ...........................................................................................................52
3.4.1 Important functions and parameters for communication .............................................................52
3.4.2 Load management .......................................................................................................................53
3.4.3 Extended protection function .......................................................................................................54
3.4.4 Threshold values..........................................................................................................................55
Table of contents
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
4 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.4.5 Lower limit of power transmission............................................................................................... 55
3.4.6 Direction of incoming supply ....................................................................................................... 55
3.4.7 Events and tripping operations ................................................................................................... 56
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules.................................................................................................... 57
3.5.1 General information..................................................................................................................... 57
3.5.1.1 Rotary coding switch................................................................................................................... 58
3.5.1.2 Installing the CubicleBUS modules............................................................................................. 58
3.5.1.3 Connection of the power supply.................................................................................................. 59
3.5.1.4 Maximum configuration of the CubicleBUS ................................................................................59
3.5.1.5 Installation guidelines for the CubicleBUS.................................................................................. 60
3.5.1.6 Connection of external CubicleBUS modules............................................................................. 60
3.5.1.7 LED indicator............................................................................................................................... 63
3.5.1.8 Test of the digital input and output modules ............................................................................... 64
3.5.2 Digital input module..................................................................................................................... 66
3.5.2.1 Parameter set changeover.......................................................................................................... 67
3.5.2.2 Technical data............................................................................................................................. 68
3.5.3 Digital output module with rotary coding switch..........................................................................68
3.5.3.1 Technical data............................................................................................................................. 70
3.5.4 Configuration of the digital output module .................................................................................. 71
3.5.4.1 Technical data............................................................................................................................. 71
3.5.4.2 LED indicator............................................................................................................................... 73
3.5.5 Analog output module ................................................................................................................. 74
3.5.5.1 Selecting the measured values................................................................................................... 75
3.5.5.2 Test function................................................................................................................................ 79
3.5.5.3 Technical data............................................................................................................................. 79
3.6 Measuring accuracy .................................................................................................................... 80
3.6.1 3WL breaker measuring accuracy .............................................................................................. 80
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS ......................................................................... 80
3.7.1 Power required by a SENTRON WL with CubicleBUS............................................................... 80
3.7.2 Selecting the power supply ......................................................................................................... 82
4 SENTRON VL.......................................................................................................................................... 85
4.1 Brief description .......................................................................................................................... 85
4.1.1 Brief description of SENTRON VL .............................................................................................. 85
4.1.2 Overview of the accessories ....................................................................................................... 86
4.1.3 Properties of the trip units ........................................................................................................... 88
4.1.4 Electronic overcurrent tripping systems ...................................................................................... 88
4.1.5 Protection functions..................................................................................................................... 88
4.1.6 Data transfer by means of Modbus RTU .................................................................................... 91
4.2 COM21 connection ..................................................................................................................... 93
4.2.1 Data exchange with the COM21 ................................................................................................. 93
4.2.2 Setting the MODBUS address of the COM21............................................................................. 94
4.2.3 COM21 pin assignment............................................................................................................... 95
4.2.4 Write protection with COM21 ...................................................................................................... 96
4.2.5 Communication connection to the ETU ......................................................................................96
4.2.6 Connecting the optional motorized operating mechanism to COM21 ........................................ 97
4.2.7 LED display on the COM21....................................................................................................... 102
5 Zone Selective Interlocking.................................................................................................................... 105
5.1 ZSI............................................................................................................................................. 105
Table of contents
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 5
5.1.1 Selectivity...................................................................................................................................105
5.1.2 Time selectivity...........................................................................................................................105
5.1.3 ZSI function................................................................................................................................106
5.1.4 Operating principle.....................................................................................................................107
5.1.5 Course over time........................................................................................................................107
5.1.5.1 Condition ZSI = ON and presence of a short-circuit (S) ............................................................107
5.1.5.2 Condition ZSI = ON and presence of a ground fault (G) ...........................................................108
5.2 Examples ...................................................................................................................................109
5.2.1 Function example.......................................................................................................................109
5.2.2 Tabular representation...............................................................................................................110
5.2.2.1 Short-circuit................................................................................................................................110
5.2.2.2 Ground fault ...............................................................................................................................110
5.2.2.3 Example of 3 grading levels without coupling switch.................................................................111
5.2.2.4 Cancelation of the ZSI OUT signal ............................................................................................112
5.2.2.5 Coupling switch..........................................................................................................................113
5.2.2.6 Wiring example ..........................................................................................................................114
5.2.2.7 Circuit breakers without ZSI function .........................................................................................116
5.3 SENTRON 3WL .........................................................................................................................117
5.3.1 Technical data............................................................................................................................117
5.3.2 Applications................................................................................................................................118
5.3.3 Configuration..............................................................................................................................118
5.3.4 Connection.................................................................................................................................118
5.3.5 Test function...............................................................................................................................118
5.3.6 LED ............................................................................................................................................118
5.4 SENTRON 3VL ..........................................................................................................................119
5.4.1 COM20/COM 21 ........................................................................................................................119
5.4.2 Technical data............................................................................................................................119
5.4.3 Applications................................................................................................................................120
5.4.4 Configuration..............................................................................................................................120
5.4.5 Connection.................................................................................................................................120
5.4.6 LED ............................................................................................................................................121
6 Modbus RTU data transfer..................................................................................................................... 123
6.1 Integration of the circuit breakers into a communication system...............................................123
6.2 Modbus RTU..............................................................................................................................123
6.2.1 Structure of the job message frame...........................................................................................123
6.2.2 Character frames .......................................................................................................................124
6.2.3 Communication parameter settings ...........................................................................................125
6.2.4 Data storage...............................................................................................................................126
6.2.4.1 Control bytes..............................................................................................................................126
6.2.4.2 Status bytes ...............................................................................................................................127
6.2.4.3 Basic type data ..........................................................................................................................128
6.2.4.4 Value buffer area .......................................................................................................................130
6.2.5 Function codes...........................................................................................................................131
6.2.5.1 Function "01 – Read output bits"................................................................................................131
6.2.5.2 Function "02 – Read input" ........................................................................................................132
6.2.5.3 Function "03 – Read value buffer area" .....................................................................................133
6.2.5.4 Function "04 – Read basic type data"........................................................................................134
6.2.5.5 Function "05 – Write individual output" ......................................................................................135
6.2.5.6 Function "07 – Read diagnostic information" .............................................................................136
Table of contents
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
6 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.7 Function "08 – Diagnostics" ...................................................................................................... 137
6.2.5.8 Function "11 – Get number of messages" ................................................................................ 139
6.2.5.9 Function code "12 – Communication events" ........................................................................... 140
6.2.5.10 Function "15 – Write output block" ............................................................................................ 141
6.2.5.11 Function "16 – Write value buffer area" .................................................................................... 142
6.2.5.12 Summary of exception messages............................................................................................. 143
6.3 Transition to TCP/IP networks .................................................................................................. 145
7 powerconfig ........................................................................................................................................... 147
7.1 Brief description ........................................................................................................................ 147
7.2 Delivery form ............................................................................................................................. 148
7.3 Software requirements.............................................................................................................. 148
7.4 Online with powerconfig............................................................................................................ 149
7.5 Offline with powerconfig............................................................................................................ 149
7.6 User interface............................................................................................................................ 150
7.7 "Overview" view ........................................................................................................................ 151
7.8 "Parameters" view..................................................................................................................... 153
7.9 Communication link to the circuit breakers ............................................................................... 154
7.9.1 USB/RS485 adapter as point-to-point link ................................................................................ 154
7.9.2 USB/RS485 adapter.................................................................................................................. 155
7.9.3 LAN/RS485 gateway................................................................................................................. 156
8 Data library ............................................................................................................................................ 157
8.1 The data library ......................................................................................................................... 157
8.2 Chapter overview ...................................................................................................................... 157
8.3 Scaling....................................................................................................................................... 158
8.4 Abbreviations of the data sources............................................................................................. 158
8.5 Units .......................................................................................................................................... 159
8.6 Function classes ....................................................................................................................... 159
8.6.1 Function classes of the data points........................................................................................... 159
8.6.2 Data points for controlling the SENTRON circuit breakers ....................................................... 160
8.6.3 Data points for detailed diagnostics of the SENTRON circuit breakers.................................... 160
8.6.4 Data points for identifying the SENTRON circuit breakers ....................................................... 162
8.6.5 Data points for measured values current ..................................................................................164
8.6.6 Data points for measured values voltage..................................................................................166
8.6.7 Data points for measured values power ................................................................................... 168
8.6.8 Data points for other measured values ..................................................................................... 170
8.6.9 Data points for the time stamp (TS) of the measured values ................................................... 172
8.6.10 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (primary protection function) ........................... 174
8.6.11 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (extended protection function) ........................ 176
8.6.12 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (parameters for threshold value alarms)......... 178
8.6.13 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (communication, measured value
adjustment, etc.)........................................................................................................................ 181
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL ........................................................................................... 182
8.7.1 Register block RB 51 main overview ........................................................................................ 182
Table of contents
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 7
8.7.2 Register block RB 64 data of the harmonic analysis .................................................................185
8.7.3 Register block RB 68 data of the CubicleBUS module..............................................................186
8.7.4 Register block RB 69 status of the modules..............................................................................187
8.7.5 Register block RB 72 min. and max. measured values.............................................................189
8.7.6 Register block RB 73 min. and max. measured values of the voltages ....................................193
8.7.7 Register block RB 74 min. and max. measured values of the powers ......................................196
8.7.8 Register block RB 76 min. and max. measured values of the frequency and the THD ............198
8.7.9 Register block RB 77 min. and max. measured values of the temperatures ............................200
8.7.10 Register block RB 91 statistics information ...............................................................................201
8.7.11 Register block RB 92 diagnostics data ......................................................................................203
8.7.12 Register block RB 93 control of the circuit breakers..................................................................205
8.7.13 Register block RB 94 current measured values ........................................................................207
8.7.14 Register block RB 97 Detailed identification..............................................................................213
8.7.15 Register block RB 100 Identification in overview.......................................................................215
8.7.16 Register block RB 128 parameters of the metering function and extended protection
function.......................................................................................................................................216
8.7.17 Register block RB 129 parameters of the protection function and settings for load
shedding and load pick up .........................................................................................................219
8.7.18 Register block RB 131 switching the parameters for the extended protection function and
the threshold values on and off..................................................................................................223
8.7.19 Register block RB 130 parameters for the threshold values .....................................................226
8.7.20 Register block RB 160 parameters for communication .............................................................231
8.7.21 Register block RB 162 device configuration..............................................................................232
8.7.22 Register block RB 165 identification comment ..........................................................................233
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas........................................................................................................234
8.8.1 Cyclic data..................................................................................................................................234
8.8.2 Protection settings .....................................................................................................................237
8.8.3 Diagnostics/counters..................................................................................................................239
8.8.4 Configuration..............................................................................................................................240
8.8.5 Trip log .......................................................................................................................................240
8.8.6 Commands.................................................................................................................................241
8.8.7 Settings and status of the communication module ....................................................................242
8.8.8 Description of the communication module.................................................................................242
8.8.9 ETU identification.......................................................................................................................243
8.8.10 Identification of the communication module...............................................................................243
8.9 Formats......................................................................................................................................243
8.9.1 Formats of the data points .........................................................................................................243
8.9.2 General data formats .................................................................................................................244
8.9.3 Special data formats ..................................................................................................................246
8.9.4 Data formats 15 to 24 ................................................................................................................247
8.9.5 Data formats 88 to 162 ..............................................................................................................252
8.9.6 Data formats 307 to 373 ............................................................................................................260
8.9.7 Data formats 401 to 426 ............................................................................................................263
A List of abbreviations............................................................................................................................... 267
A.1 List of abbreviations ...................................................................................................................267
Glossary ................................................................................................................................................ 269
Index...................................................................................................................................................... 273
Table of contents
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
8 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 9
Introduction and overview 1
1.1 General information
1.1.1 Structure of the manual
Purpose of the manual
This manual describes the diverse application options of circuit breakers with communication
capability in power distribution.
1.1.2 Introduction
In industrial automation, the demand for communication capability, data transparency and
flexibility is growing constantly. To enable industrial switchgear technology to meet this
demand, the use of bus systems and intelligent switching devices is unavoidable since
industrial production and building management are now inconceivable without
communication technology.
The demands on the electrical and mechanical properties of circuit breakers, their
adaptability and cost-effectiveness have contributed to the unexpectedly far-reaching
development of circuit breakers in recent years. Progress in rationalization and automation
has accelerated this process.
Introduction and overview
1.1 General information
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
10 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
1.1.3 SENTRON circuit breakers
SENTRON is a range of circuit breakers with communication capability comprising two
models:
● SENTRON WL: air circuit breaker
● SENTRON VL: compact circuit breaker
In power distribution systems they can transfer important information via bus systems to a
central control room for the purpose of:
● Instantaneous values
● Energy values
● Demand values
● Min / Max
● Diagnostics management
● Fault management
● Maintenance management
● Cost center management
Utilization of the resulting possibilities turns a circuit breaker into something more than just a
switching and protection device. Only when the automation and low-voltage switchgear and
controlgear used can be fully integrated into a communication solution in a user-friendly and
fully functional way, can the following functions be implemented:
● Integrated communication
● Data acquisition
● Forwarding
● Evaluation
● Visualization of data
Data acquisition and evaluation
Status information, alarm messages, trigger information, and threshold violations (e.g.
overcurrent, phase unbalance, overvoltage) are acquired and forwarded. Transparency in
power distribution enables a fast response to such statuses. Important messages can be
transmitted to the cell phones of the maintenance personnel as text messages by means of
additional modules (e.g. WinCC and Funkserver Pro). Timely evaluation of this data enables
selective intervention in the process and prevents plant failures.
Introduction and overview
1.1 General information
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 11
Maintenance
Information for preventive maintenance (e.g. number of switching cycles or operating hours)
enables timely planning of personnel and material. This increases the level of plant
availability. Destruction of sensitive system components due to failures is prevented.
Communication helps to provide specific information about the location and cause of power
failures. Recording of phase currents allows precise determination of the cause of the fault
(e.g. triggered by short circuit of 2317 A in phase L2 on 27.08.2007 at 14:27). This is the
basis for fast correction of the fault and creates a significant potential for cost savings.
Statistics and cost-effectiveness
Recording of power, energy and the power factor cos φ opens up further possibilities.
Energy profiles can be created and the costs can be clearly allocated thanks to the
transparent representation of energy consumption for business administration analysis.
Energy costs can later be optimized by compensating for load peaks and troughs.
Modular and intelligent
The SENTRON circuit breaker program consists of a small number of components with a
host of combination options, and it encompasses a performance range from 16 A to 6300 A.
The versatility in power distribution achieved by this modularity enables low-cost, flexible
integration of the SENTRON circuit breakers into higher-level system solutions using
communication.
Saving costs
The benefits of the SENTRON circuit breakers result both from their modular design and
compact construction. This saves costs for work processes in planning and trade, and for
switchgear manufacturers and plant operators. It also saves space and energy.
Easy planning
This results from the use of the SENTRON circuit breakers and the SIMARIS deSign
planning tool, which enables the solution of previously tedious and difficult processes,
primarily for planning offices but also for control cabinet builders.
System solutions
Embedding of the SENTRON circuit breakers into a higher-level communication system
makes it possible to parameterize the circuit breakers via Modbus RTU, PROFIBUS DP,
Ethernet or the Internet, or to optimize the entire power distribution system by means of an
integrated power management system (e.g. powermanager).
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
12 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
1.2 Bus systems
Bus systems are used to connect distributed devices with various levels of intelligence. Bus
systems differ in their topologies and mechanisms, with some designed for quite specific
application cases, and others aimed more at open applications.
Bus systems in automation
The most important bus systems in the areas of automation and power distribution are
described below:
● PROFIBUS DP
● Ethernet
● Modbus RTU
1.2.1 Modbus RTU
Definition/standard
Modbus RTU is an open, serial communication protocol based on the master-slave
architecture. It can be implemented extremely easily on any serial interfaces. Modbus RTU
comprises one master and several slaves, with communication controlled exclusively by the
master.
Communication
Modbus RTU has two fundamental communication mechanisms:
● Query/response (Polling): The master sends a request frame to any station and expects a
response frame.
● Broadcast: The master sends a command to all stations on the network. These execute
the command without acknowledgment.
Message frames
The message frames allow process data (input/output data) to be written or read either
individually or in groups.
Modbus RTU is used on different transmission media. Implementation on the RS485
physical bus, a shielded, twisted-pair cable with terminating resistors, is widespread.
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 13
Applications
The Modbus RTU protocol is used for:
● Networking of controllers
● Linking input/output modules
Use of Modbus RTU is recommended above all for applications with:
● Low time requirements
1.2.2 Ethernet
Definition/standard
Industrial Ethernet is a powerful cell network in accordance with the IEE 802.3 (ETHERNET)
standard. Transfer rates up to 1 Gbit/s in conjunction with "Switching Full Duplex" and
"Autosensing" make it possible to adapt the required power in the system to the prevailing
requirements. The data rate can be selected to suit particular needs, as integrated
compatibility makes it possible to introduce the technology in stages. With a current market
share of over 80%, Ethernet is the most frequently used LAN in the world.
The benefits of Ethernet are as follows:
● Ethernet is especially suitable for harsh industrial environments subject to
electromagnetic interference.
● With the new technology of the Internet, Ethernet offers diverse options for global
networking.
● With Industrial Ethernet, SIMATIC NET ® offers the means of using intranets, extranets
and the Internet - already available in the office area - in EMI-polluted production
processes and process automation.
Communication between peers
Ethernet is not designed on the master-slave principle like PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU.
All nodes are equal peers on the bus and each can transmit and/or receive.
A sender can only start transmitting on the bus if no other node is transmitting at that
moment. This is implemented by having each node "listen in" to determine if message
frames are addressed to it or if there is currently no active sender. If a sender has started
transmitting, the transmitted frame is checked for corruption. If the frame is not modified,
transmission is continued.
If the sender detects corruption in its data, another sender must have started before it, and
both nodes terminate transmission. The sender restarts transmission again after a random
time.
This access procedure is called CSMA/CD. This "random" access procedure cannot
guarantee that a reply is sent within a specific time period. That depends heavily on the bus
traffic load. For this reason, it is not possible to implement real-time applications with
Ethernet.
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
14 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Data transfer
There are several methods of transferring the data of the SENTRON circuit breakers on
PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU to Ethernet. These are represented here by two solutions
using SIEMENS components:
Solution 1 A SIMATIC S7 controller is equipped with a PROFIBUS DP or
Modbus RTU interface (CPU-internal interface or modules with
communications processors) and an Ethernet interface. The data
transferred by the circuit breakers over PROFIBUS DP or Modbus RTU is
"re-sorted" in the SIMATIC and communicated via Ethernet. The
CP 343-1, CP 343-1 IT, CP 343-1 PN, CP 443-1 and CP 443-1 IT are
available as possible Ethernet communications processors for the S7.
Solution 2 As an autonomous component, the IE/PB link forms the seamless
transition between Industrial Ethernet and PROFIBUS DP.
Solution 3 A 7KM PAC4200 Power Monitoring Device as a gateway (see the Chapter
Gateway in TCP / IP networks (Page 145))
Ordering information
Ordering information and further gateway options can be found in the Catalog "Industrial
Communication" (IK PI) Chapter 8.
1.2.3 PROFIBUS DP
Definition/standard
PROFIBUS DP is an open, standardized and multi-vendor fieldbus system. It is standardized
in compliance with IEC 61158/EN 50170 and is thus the ideal basis for the high data
exchange requirements in the area of distributed I/O and field devices. To-date (July 2007),
more than 1,100 manufacturers offer in excess of 1,700 products and the user organizations
in 23 countries support the users of more than 4 million installed PROFIBUS nodes.
Integration into automation systems
Integration and linking to current concepts in automation is similarly unproblematic since all
the large manufacturers offer PROFIBUS DP master modules for programmable logic
controllers (PLCs). And with high data transfer rates of up to 12 MBaud/s, the systems
operate almost in real time.
Master-master communication
The protocol used for PROFIBUS DP node communication ensures communication between
the complex automation devices with equal priority (masters). Each node completes its
communication tasks within a fixed time frame.
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 15
Master-slave communication (token-passing procedure)
Furthermore, simple cyclic data exchange is used for communication between a master and
the simple I/O devices (slaves) assigned to it. PROFIBUS DP uses a hybrid bus access
control for this comprising a central token-passing procedure between the active bus nodes
(masters) and a central master-slave procedure for data exchange between the active and
passive bus nodes.
System configuration
The following system configurations can be implemented with this bus access control:
● Pure master-slave system
● Pure master-master system with token passing
● A combination of both systems
The following figure shows communication on PROFIBUS:
● Token passing between the available masters
● Polling between master and slave nodes
/RJLFWRNHQULQJEHWZHHQWKHPDVWHUGHYLFHV
$FWLYHVWDWLRQVPDVWHUGHYLFHV
3DVVLYHVWDWLRQVVODYHGHYLFHV
7UDQVGX
FHU
'ULYH
6HQVRU
$FWXDWRU
'ULYH
6HQVRU
6(17521
352),%86
Figure 1-1 Communication on PROFIBUS
The figure above shows an example with three master modules and seven slaves. The three
master devices form a logical ring. The token is controlled by the MAC (media access
control). It generates the token in the startup phase and checks if actually only one token
circulates in the logical ring.
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
16 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Master classes
Each slave that communicates cyclically via PROFIBUS DP is assigned to a class 1 master.
Cyclic data traffic takes place in accordance with the DP standard profile (DPV0).
Master class 1 A class 1 master is used primarily for performing automation tasks. In
addition to cyclic data exchange, a class 1 master can also establish an
acyclic communication connection with its slaves and thus make use of the
expanded functions of a slave.
Master class 2 A class 2 master is especially suitable for commissioning, diagnostics and
visualization tasks. It is connected to PROFIBUS DP in addition to the class
1 master and can access slaves via acyclic services and exchange data,
provided the slaves permit it.
Acyclic data transfer
Acyclic data transfer is implemented via DPV1. DPV1/DPV2 adds several functions to the
existing PROFIBUS standard for this purpose. These include reparameterization of the slave
configuration during operation, and the establishment of acyclic data traffic. With the help of
DPV1, data can also be read direct from the slave by a class 2 master, even though it still
has a logical link to a class 1 master. In physical terms, DPV1 transfer and DP standard
transfer take place over one line.
Acyclic data transfer is used, for example, in conjunction with operator control and
monitoring systems such as WinCC or configuration software like Switch ES Power. The PC
used here with built-in PROFIBUS DP interface card then handles the function as a class 2
master. From there, the data sets are transferred via DPV1 and the new values are set, e.g.
in the case of changing the value for the tripping current. However, cyclic data exchange
between the circuit breaker and the PLC continues.
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 17
1.2.4 Communication structure of the SENTRON circuit breakers
The figure below provides an overview of the communication options of the SENTRON
circuit breakers and their modules.
Modbus RTU
5
1
19
20
17
2
18
12 13 14 15 16 6
7
1
3
8
9
10
11
4
20
Modbus RTU
Ethernet
CubicleBUS
① 3VL molded-case circuit breaker ⑪ Metering function PLUS
② Electronic trip unit LCD ETU ⑫ ZSI module
③ Electronic trip unit ETU ⑬ Digital output module with relay contacts
④ COM21 Modbus RTU from Release 2 - including ZSI ⑭ Digital output module with relay contacts,
configurable
⑤ COM21 Modbus RTU - including ZSI ⑮ Analog output module
⑥ BDA PLUS with Ethernet interface ⑯ Digital input module
⑦ 3WL air circuit breaker ⑰ Software tool, e.g.
powerconfig
from V2.2 on PC
⑧ COM16 Modbus RTU ⑱ PLC, e.g. SIMATIC S7
⑨ Breaker Status Sensor (BSS) ⑲ HMI, e.g.
powermanager
⑩ Electronic trip unit ETU ⑳ 7KM PAC Power Monitoring Devices
Figure 1-2 System architecture of the SENTRON circuit breakers - Modbus RTU
Introduction and overview
1.2 Bus systems
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
18 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 19
General information 2
2.1 Other system manuals and literature
Sources of information and other documentation
The following manuals supplement the present manual:
Operating Instructions of the SENTRON WL circuit breaker 3ZX1812-0WL00-0AN1
System manual for the SENTRON VL circuit breaker 3ZX1012-0VL10-0AB1
System manual for 3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability -
PROFIBUS
A5E01051347-02
2.2 Approvals
The SENTRON product range complies with the following directives:
●Low Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC
●EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
●Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.: UL 508 registered (Industrial Control Equipment)
●Canadian Standards Association: CSA C22.2 Number 142, tested (Process Control
Equipment)
2.3 Standards and approvals
The SENTRON series is based on the IEC 60947-2 standard. PROFIBUS DP meets all the
requirements and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2, and the requirements for CE marking.
3VL/3WL have CSA and UL approvals.
The SENTRON VL/WL circuit breakers comply with the standards:
● IEC 60947-1, EN 60947-1
● DIN VDE 0660, Part 100
● IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
● DIN VDE 0660, Part 101
● Isolating features in accordance with IEC 60947-2, EN 60947-2
General information
2.4 Orientation aids
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
20 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
2.4 Orientation aids
The manual contains various features supporting quick access to specific information:
● At the beginning of the manual you will find a table of contents.
● The chapters contain subheadings that provide an overview of the content of the section.
● Following the appendices, a glossary defines important technical terms used in the
manual.
● Finally, a comprehensive index allows quick access to information on specific subjects.
2.5 Up-to-the-minute information at all times
Your regional contact for low-voltage switchgear with communication capability will be happy
to help you with any queries you have regarding the SENTRON series. A list of contacts and
the latest version of the manual are available on the Internet at:
SENTRON (http://www.siemens.com/sentron)
2.6 Scope
This manual applies to circuit breakers with the following designations:
SENTRON
● VL160 to VL1600
● VL150 UL to VL1600 UL
● 3WL1, 3WL2, 3WL3 and 3WL5
Disclaimer of liability
The products described here were developed to perform safety-oriented functions as part of
an overall installation or machine. A complete safety-oriented system generally features
sensors, evaluation units, signaling units, and reliable shutdown concepts. It is the
responsibility of the manufacturer to ensure that a system or machine is functioning properly
as a whole. Siemens AG, its regional offices, and associated companies (hereinafter referred
to as "Siemens") cannot guarantee all the properties of a whole plant or machine that has
not been designed by Siemens.
Nor can Siemens assume liability for recommendations that appear or are implied in the
following description. No new guarantee, warranty, or liability claims beyond the scope of the
Siemens general terms of supply are to be derived or inferred from the following description.
Up-to-the-minute information
You can find further assistance on the
Internet at: Technical support (http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/technical-support)
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 21
SENTRON WL 3
3.1 Introduction and overview
3.1.1 The CubicleBUS
Within the integrated and modular architecture of the SENTRON WL, the CubicleBUS
connects all intelligent components within the SENTRON WL and enables simple and safe
connection of other external additional components. The CubicleBUS is already prepared in
all complete circuit breakers with the trip units ETU45B / ETU745 / ETU748 and ETU76B /
ETU776 (CubicleBUS integrated).
Retrofitting components
The high modularity of the system allows retrofitting of communication functions (e.g.
metering function) at any time. Retrofitting of a SENTRON WL that does not yet have
communication capability is also possible on-site in the plant. All modules on the
CubicleBUS can access the available source data of the circuit breaker direct and thus
ensure extremely high-speed access to information.
In addition, the connection of external add-on modules to CubicleBUS allows low-cost
solutions for connecting further communication-capable devices in the switching station.
3.1.2 Communications capability of electronic trip units (ETU)
The electronic trip units ETU45B / ETU745 / ETU748 and ETU76B / ETU776 are all capable
of communication. The CubicleBUS is brought out at the terminals X8:1 to X8:4 in the circuit
breaker.
Versions
The communication-capable trip units differ in their design:
● The ETU45B / ETU745 / ETU748 has a rotary coding switch on the front for setting the
protection parameters. These can only be read via the communication system.
● Optionally, the ETU45B / ETU745 / ETU748 can be equipped with a four-line display for
showing the measured values.
● The ETU76B / ETU776 offers a pixel-graphics display with a clear, key-operated menu.
This display can be used not only to show measured values, status information and
maintenance information, but also to read all available parameters and modify them with
password protection.
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
22 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Tripping system
The table below provides an overview of the functions and options of the communication-
capable trip units ETU45B / ETU745 / ETU748 and ETU76B / ETU776.
3.1.3 Function overview of the overcurrent tripping system
Table 3- 1 Function overview of the tripping system of the IEC ETUs
Basic function ETU45B ETU76B
Overload protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off – ✓
Adjustment range IR = In × ... 0.4_0,45_0,5_0,55_0.6
0.65_0,7_0,8_0,9_1
0.4...1
Switchable overload protection
(I2t or I4t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Adjustment range time-lag class tR
at 6 × IR for I2t
2_3.5_5.5_8_10_14_1_21_2530 s 2...30 s
Adjustment range time-lag class tR
at 6 × IR for I4t
1-2-3-4-5 s 1...5 s
Thermal memory can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Phase loss sensitivity at tsd = 20 ms (M) ✓ (on/off)
N-conductor protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
N-conductor adjustment range
IN = In × ...
0.5...1 0.2...2
Short-time delayed short-circuit
protection
✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Adjustment range Isd = In × ... 1.25_1,5_2_2,5_3_4_6_8_10_12 1.25 x In...0.8 x Icw
Adjustment range delay time tsd M-100-200-300-400 ms M-80...4000 ms
Switchable short-time delayed short-
circuit protection (I2t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Adjustment range delay time tsd
at I2t
100-200-300-400 ms 100...400 ms
ZSI function Via CubicleBUS module Via CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
Adjustment range Ii = In × ... 1.5_2.2_3_4_6_8_10_12 x Ics 1.5 x In...0.8 x Ics
Ground-fault protection Retrofittable module Retrofittable module
Tripping and alarm functions ✓ ✓
Tripping function can be switched on/off ✓ ✓
,1
16(D
Alarm function can be switched on/off – ✓
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 23
Basic function ETU45B ETU76B
Recording of the ground-fault current via
summation current conversion with
internal or external N-conductor
transformer
✓ ✓
Recording of the ground-fault current via
external transformer
✓ ✓
Adjustment range of the response
current Ig for tripping
A-B-C-D-E A...E*
Adjustment range of the response
current Ig for alarm
A-B-C-D-E A...E*
Adjustment range of the delay time tg 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100...500 ms
Switchable ground-fault protection
(I2t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Adjustment range delay time tg
at I2t
100-200-300-400-500 ms 100...500 ms
ZSI-G function Via CubicleBUS module Via CubicleBUS module
Switchable – ✓
LCD alphanumeric (4-line) Optional –
LCD graphical – ✓
CubicleBUS integrated ✓ ✓
Communication capability ✓ ✓
NSE00889
Metering function capability with
metering function PLUS
✓ ✓
Overcurrent release active ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓
L tripping operation ✓ ✓
S tripping operation ✓ ✓
I tripping operation ✓ ✓
N tripping operation ✓ ✓
G tripping operation ✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
G alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Tripping operation as a result of
extended protection function
✓ ✓
NSE00890
Communication ✓ ✓
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
24 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Basic function ETU45B ETU76B
Load pick up ✓ ✓
Load shedding ✓ ✓
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms ✓ ✓
Temperature alarm ✓ ✓
Phase unbalance ✓ ✓
Instantaneous short-circuit trip ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed short-circuit trip ✓ ✓
Overload trip ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor trip ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection trip ✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Ground-fault alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Auxiliary relay ✓ ✓
NSE00891
ETU fault ✓ ✓
* Set values for Ig
Size I/II
A 100 A
B 300 A
C 600 A
D 900 A
E 1200 A
Size III
A 400 A
B 600 A
C 800 A
D 1000 A
E 1200 A
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 25
Table 3- 2 Function overview of the tripping system of the UL-ETUs
Basic function ETU745 / ETU748 ETU776
Overload protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off – –
Adjustment range IR = In × ... 0.4_0,45_0,5_0,55_0,6-0.65_
0,7_0,8_0,9_1
0.4...1 (increment: 1A)
Switchable overload protection
(I2t or I4t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Adjustment range time-lag class tR
at 6 × IR for I2t
2_3,5_5,5_8_10_
14_17_21_25_30
2_..._30 (increment:
0.1s)
Adjustment range time-lag class tR
at 6 × IR for I4t
1_2_3_4_5 1_..._5 (increment: 0.1s)
Thermal memory can be switched
on/off
✓ (via slide switch) ✓ (via keypad or
communication)
Phase loss sensitivity at tsd = 20 ms (M) ✓ (via keypad or
communication)
N-conductor protection ✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ (via slide switch) ✓ (via slide switch)
N-conductor adjustment range
IN = In × ...
0.5...1 0.5...1
Short-time delayed short-circuit
protection
✓ ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ (via rotary switch) ✓ (via keypad or
communication)
Adjustment range Isd = In × ... 1.25_1,5_2_2,5_3_4_6_8_10_12 1.25_..._0.8 x Icw = max.
(increment: 10 A)
Adjustment range delay time tsd
at I2d (s)
0.02
(M)_0.1_0.2_
0.3_0.4_OFF
0.02
(M)_0.1_0.2_0.3_0.4
M_0.08_..._0.4_OFF
(increment: 0.001s)
Switchable short-time delayed short-
circuit protection
(I2t-dependent function)
✓ (via rotary switch) ✓ (via keypad or
communication)
Adjustment range delay time tsd
at I2t
0.1_0,2_0,3_0.4 0.1_..._0,4
(increment: 0.001s)
ZSI function Via CubicleBUS module Via CubicleBUS module
Instantaneous short-circuit protection ✓ — ✓
Function can be switched on/off ✓ (via rotary
switch)
— ✓ (via keypad or
communication)
Adjustment range Ii = In × ... 1.5_2,2_3_4_6
_8_10_12
0.8 x Icw =
max.,
OFF = Icw
— 1.5 x In...0.8 x Ics = max.,
OFF = Icw
Ground-fault protection2 Retrofittable module Retrofittable module
Tripping and alarm functions ✓ ✓
Tripping function can be switched
on/off
,1
16(D
Alarm function can be switched on/off
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
26 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Basic function ETU745 / ETU748 ETU776
Recording of the ground-fault current
via summation current conversion
with internal or external N-conductor
transformer
✓ ✓
Recording of the ground-fault current
via external transformer
Adjustment range of the response
current Ig for tripping
A-B-C-D-E A...E (increment: 1 A)
Adjustment range of the response
current Ig for alarm
A-B-C-D-E A...E (increment: 1 A
Adjustment range of the delay time tg 100-200-300-400-500 ms 100...500 ms
(increment: 0.001s)
Switchable ground-fault protection
(I2t-dependent function)
✓ ✓
Adjustment range delay time tg
at I2t
100-200-300-400-500 ms 100...500 ms
(increment: 0.001s)
ZSI-G function Via CubicleBUS module Via CubicleBUS module
Switchable – ✓
LCD alphanumeric (4-line) Optional –
LCD graphical – ✓
CubicleBUS integrated ✓ ✓
Communication capability ✓ ✓
NSE00889
Metering function capability with
metering function PLUS
✓ ✓
Overcurrent release active ✓ ✓
Alarm ✓ ✓
ETU fault ✓ ✓
L tripping operation ✓ ✓
S tripping operation ✓ ✓
I tripping operation ✓ ✓
N tripping operation ✓ ✓
G tripping operation ✓ (only with ground-fault protection
module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
G alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault protection
module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Tripping operation as a result of
extended protection function
✓ ✓
NSE00890
Communication ✓ ✓
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 27
Basic function ETU745 / ETU748 ETU776
Load pick up ✓ ✓
Load shedding ✓ ✓
Leading signal overload trip 200 ms ✓ ✓
Temperature alarm ✓ ✓
Phase unbalance ✓ ✓
Instantaneous short-circuit trip ✓ ✓
Short-time delayed short-circuit trip ✓ ✓
Overload trip ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor trip ✓ ✓
Ground-fault protection trip ✓ (only with ground-fault protection
module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Ground-fault alarm ✓ (only with ground-fault protection
module)
✓ (only with ground-fault
protection module)
Auxiliary relay ✓ ✓
NSE00891
ETU fault ✓ ✓
1 With the setting Ii = Off = IEP the circuit breaker can be used even at the maximum short-circuit breaking capacity and
above.
2 Once it has been installed, the ground-fault protection module cannot be uninstalled.
3.1.4 Availability of the data on the CubicleBUS
Data library
Each data point from the data library of the SENTRON circuit breakers can only be
generated by a single module, the data source. If this data source (node) is available, the
data points assigned to the data source will also be available.
This availability is described and also communicated in the "property bytes". If a data source
(node) is not available, the data point will also not exist. This can also be seen in the
associated property byte. Chapter Data library (Page 157) provides a precise description of
the individual data points.
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
28 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Data point groups
The table below provides an overview of the internal CubicleBUS nodes and their assigned
data point groups (combination of several data points). The table below shows which data
points from the data library are generated by which CubicleBUS module:
Table 3- 3 Assignment of data points to CubicleBUS modules
CubicleBUS nodes
Data point group
Data points with the same source ETU from
ETU45B /
ETU745
BSS COM16 Metering function
PLUS
Protection parameter set A ✓
Protection parameter set B
(not for ETU45B / ETU745)
✓
Extended protection parameters ✓
Parameters for threshold values ✓
Communication parameters ✓
Parameters for setting measured values ✓
Data for device identification ✓ ✓
Switch position information ✓
Status information (switch on/off, spring
energy store, etc.)
✓
Alarms ✓
Tripping operations ✓ ✓
Threshold value messages ✓
Maintenance information ✓ ✓
Temperature in circuit breaker ✓
Temperature in the control cabinet ✓
3-phase currents ✓
Current in N-conductor, ground-fault
current; depending on equipment
✓
3-phase voltages ✓
Power P, Q, S, energy ✓
Cos φ ✓
Frequency, total harmonic distortion, form
factor, peak factor
✓
Harmonic analysis ✓
Waveform buffer ✓
Logbook for events and tripping operations ✓
System time ✓
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 29
3.1.5 Brief description of SENTRON WL
As well as the traditional tasks of circuit breakers, the protection of plants,
transformers, generators and motors, additional requirements
have been added:
● A complete overview of the plant from a central control room is required
● All the information must be available at all times
Networking of the breakers with each other and with other components is the
defining feature of a modern power distribution system. The 3WL family of air circuit
breakers
also offers:
● Remote diagnostics and service over the Internet
● Operating personnel is informed in good time of faults in the plant
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
30 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
① Guide frame ⑭ Key-operated EMERGENCY STOP
pushbutton
② Main front terminal, flange, horizontal,
vertical
⑮ Motorized operating mechanism
③ Position signaling switch ⑯ Switching cycles counter
④ Grounding contact, leading ⑰ Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
⑤ Shutters ⑱ Overcurrent release (ETU)
⑥ COM16 Modbus RTU module ⑲ Reset solenoid
⑦ External CubicleBUS modules ⑳ Breaker Data Adapter PLUS (BDA PLUS)
⑧ Switch-on solenoid, auxiliary release
Four-line LCD module
⑨ Auxiliary conductor plug-in system
Ground-fault protection module
⑩ Auxiliary switch block
Rated current module
⑪ Door sealing frame
Metering function module
⑫ Locking set base plate
3WL air circuit breaker
⑬ Transparent insert, function insert
Figure 3-1 SENTRON WL, accessories
SENTRON WL
3.1 Introduction and overview
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 31
Sizes and versions
● With three sizes, the 3WL air circuit breaker covers the range from 250 A to 6300 A.
● The 3WL is available in a three-pole and four-pole version.
● There is a fixed-mounted 3WL circuit breaker version, and a withdrawable version.
● The devices are available in different switching capacity classes, so short-circuit currents
up to 150 kA can be safely shut down.
Adaptation
The 3WL air circuit breaker can be adapted to prevailing plant conditions. Each circuit
breaker can be set to the suitable rated current, for example, using a rated current module.
This ensures optimal protection characteristics even when the plant is modified. The module
can be replaced quickly. Time-consuming replacement of the transformer is not necessary.
Parameter set switchover (ETU76B / ETU776)
It is possible to switch between two different parameter sets. This function is necessary, for
example, if an automatic change is made from mains operation to generator operation in the
event of a power failure and there is the possibility of all tripping conditions changing.
Safety
It is possible to prevent undesired switching on by means of interlocks and locking options
on the switch.
Example
The accessories, from the auxiliary release, motorized operating mechanism all the way to
the communication system, are simple and easy to retrofit. The accessories are the same
across the entire range. This simplifies ordering and reduces stockkeeping costs.
Solid-state overcurrent trip unit (ETU)
The core of each switch is the solid-state overcurrent trip unit (ETU). There are different
options for adapting the protection functions, metering functions, and signaling functions to
the requirements of the plant: From simple overload protection and short-circuit protection,
up to trip units with a host of metering and signaling functions that can be parameterized
remotely.
Communication capability
All circuit breakers with trip units of the type ETU45B / ETU745, ETU748 and ETU76B /
ETU776 have communication capability. Additional components that are networked internally
via the CubicleBUS can be installed in these communication-capable trip units. To confer
communication capability on a SENTRON WL with the ETU15B or ETU25B / ETU725 or
ETU27B / ETU727 trip unit, the overcurrent release must be replaced as these trip units
have no facility for connecting to the CubicleBUS.
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
32 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Connection
The circuit breaker is connected to Modbus RTU via the RS485 interface of the COM16
module. It is possible to run networking/communication at a higher level as a Web site
(intranet/Internet) using the Breaker Data Adapter PLUS. Communication can also be
implemented with the Modbus protocol on Ethernet using an appropriate gateway (e.g.
PAC4200).
See also
powerconfig (Page 147)
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3.2.1 COM16 Modbus RTU module
With the COM16, the SENTRON WL circuit breaker can exchange data via Modbus RTU.
The COM16 fetches some of the most important information about the status of the breaker
(on/off, spring energy store, ready, etc.) from the BSS (Breaker Status Sensor) via the
CubicleBUS. This is why both modules are offered together as a Modbus RTU
communication connection (option F12).
COM16 Modbus RTU module and BSS
COM16 for SENTRON WL allows you to connect the circuit breaker to Modbus RTU. It
supports the Modbus RTU protocol.
Securing
It is possible to disable control/write access to the circuit breaker via hardware if this is
necessary for security reasons, e.g. to prevent switching via Modbus RTU
(manual/automatic mode) or to prevent the modification of parameters.
Integral clock
An integral clock adds a time stamp to all events such as minimum and maximum measured
values, alarms, and tripping signals. This clock can be synchronized via Modbus RTU.
Temperature sensor
The COM16 has an integral temperature sensor that provides the temperature in the control
cabinet thanks to its installation location outside the circuit breaker.
The BSS also contains a temperature sensor that shows the temperature in the breaker.
Both sensors are factory-calibrated.
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 33
Detecting the switch position
The switch position (operating position, test position, disconnected position and not present)
is detected by means of three built-in micro switches on the underside of COM16, and can
be read out via Modbus RTU. The circuit breaker can only be switched on and off in the
connected position and the test position.
3.2.2 Connection of the COM16 module
The COM16 is connected by plugging it into position X7 of the auxiliary conductor plug-in
system.
Pin assignment
The figure below shows the label on the COM16, the external pin assignment for connecting
the switch-on solenoid, the shunt release, Modbus RTU write protection, and the free
input/output.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
- + - + - +
CubicleBUS
F1, F2Y1
OUT
IN
Write
Enable
Open
CloseFree Free
Internal
External
Figure 3-2 COM16 pin assignment
Electrical connection to the CubicleBUS
The electrical connection to the circuit breaker and the CubicleBUS connection to the
CubicleBUS nodes inside the circuit breaker (ETU, BSS, metering function) must be
established. For this purpose, the four lines brought out of the rear of COM16 are connected
to section X8 of the auxiliary conductor plug-in system.
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
34 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Further components and connections
● If the switch-on and switch-off solenoids are designed for higher voltages than 24 V DC,
coupling relays must be used.
● If the second auxiliary trip unit (F2, F3, F4) is used instead of the first auxiliary trip unit
(F1) to switch off via Modbus RTU, the connection points X5:11 and X5:12 must be used.
● Free operator output on COM16 (from Version 08/04; firmware version V1.13.0). From
this version, the COM module offers an alternative function with which the status of the
tripped signaling switch S45 of the BSS module is output at the operator output. A high
level at the output means the circuit breaker has tripped. Switchover from the
Modbus RTU "operator output" to the Modbus RTU "tripped signal" takes place via data
point 19 (RB 93 word 5 high), with bit 4 (bit 4 to 1). Switchover to "operator output" takes
place automatically by setting or resetting the operator output (RB 93 word 5 high bit 0 or
bit 1).
● The CubicleBUS connection for RJ45 plugs to which the external CubicleBUS modules
can be connected is located on the rear. If no external CubicleBUS module is connected,
the terminating resistor supplied in the form of a RJ45 plug must be used.
● The unassigned user input can be connected via a contact element to the 24 V DC
voltage from Pin1 to transmit the status of the contact element.
● The Modbus RTU line is connected to the 9-pin interface on the front of COM16.
Assignment of the SUB-D9 socket
PIN1 Common
PIN5 B, Tx / Rx +
PIN9 A, Tx / Rx -
5 4 3 2 1
9 8 7 6
Figure 3-3 SUB-D9 socket
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 35
Connection of the COM16
The figure below shows how COM16 must be wired with the auxiliary current plug-in
contacts to allow switching on/off via Modbus RTU. This figure only applies for contacts with
24 V DC!
'&9
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
)
(78
8VHU
8VHU
&ORVH2SHQ
&20
) <
0
0
Figure 3-4 Wiring of COM16 at 24 V DC
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
36 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The figure below shows the wiring if contacts are installed with voltages not equal to 24 V
DC.
● Coupling relays must be used.
● If F1 is not used for switching off, the connection points X5:11 / X5:12 must be connected
for F2 to F4.
'&9
/
1
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
8VHU
8VHU
&ORVH2SHQ
&20
. .
. .
)
) <
0
0
(78
Figure 3-5 Wiring of COM16 at voltage not equal to 24 V DC
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 37
RJ45 connection
The figure below shows COM16 from behind. It shows the RJ45 connection for the external
CubicleBUS modules. If no external CubicleBUS module is connected, the bus must be
terminated with the terminating resistor supplied.
Figure 3-6 COM16 with RJ45 connection for CubicleBUS modules
Connection of the CubicleBUS nodes
The four black cables that are brought out of the COM16 must be connected to terminal strip
X8. The COM16 is connected with the nodes on the CubicleBUS in the circuit breaker in this
way.
Table 3- 4 Terminal strip connection X8 between COM16 and CubicleBUS nodes
Meaning Position and printing on the cable
CubicleBUS - X8:1
CubicleBUS + X8:2
+24 V DC X8:3
Ground 24 V DC X8:4
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
38 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.2.3 Write protection (WriteEnable)
In applications in power distribution, it is necessary to disable write access via the COM
module temporarily or permanently. There is a hardware input on the COM16 for this
purpose. Pin1 provides the 24 V DC supply that can be run back via a contact to Pin 2
(WriteEnable), for example.
If this input is not bridged (that is, actively enabled), write access is not possible (with
exceptions).
Without a bridge at the input of the write protection, the following actions will be disabled:
● Switching on or off
● Resetting the current tripping operation
● Changing the protection parameters
● Changing the parameters for the extended protection function (metering function)
● Changing the parameters for communication
● Changing the parameters for measured value setting (metering function)
● Resetting maintenance information (counter)
The following actions are still permitted in write-protect mode:
● Modifying and setting of trigger functions for the waveform buffer
● Reading out the contents of the waveform buffer
● Changing the parameters for threshold values
● Setting/modifying the system time
● Modifying the free texts (comment, plant identifier)
● Resetting the min./max. values
● Modifying the free user output
Transfer of necessary information
Despite the write protection, all the necessary information can be transferred, but the status
of the circuit breaker cannot be changed.
This is reserved for the operator of the power distribution system. All non-disabled actions
are used only for remote diagnostics and do not affect the current status. However, it is
possible to diagnose tripping operations and waveforms more precisely, even remotely.
3.2.4 Data exchange via the COM16
When configuring the COM16 for data exchange, you must note that the COM16 is supplied
as standard with the Modbus RTU address 126. This must be changed by the user when
configuring the system (e.g. with
powerconfig
from Version 2.2, BDA PLUS, display of the
ETU76B/ETU776).
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 39
Diagnosing the communication system
The COM16 has two LEDs labeled "MODBUS" and "CubicleBUS" for diagnosing
communication. The operating status for Modbus RTU and the CubicleBUS can be read
from these.
The figure below shows the front view of the Modbus RTU module of the SENTRON WL with
the Modbus RTU connection and the two LEDs. The lower figure shows part of the ETU745
and its LEDs for status indication.
MODBUS
02'%86
&20
&XELFOH%86
In= 1600 A
Rating Plug
ACTIVE
0(025<
(5525
78
212))
IN=.
IN
1xIn
ItIt
ALARM
COMM.
EXTEND.
ETU745
① Connecting terminals
② "MODBUS" LED
③ "CubicleBUS" LED
④ Communication LED on the trip unit
Figure 3-7 COM16 Modbus RTU module of the SENTRON WL and ETU745
"MODBUS" LED
The "MODBUS" LED shows the status of the Modbus RTU communication of the COM16
module.
Table 3- 5 "MODBUS" LED
"MODBUS" LED Meaning
Off No voltage on the COM16
Red No Modbus RTU communication:
No communication to the COM16 active
or wait time for new communication elapsed
Green Existing Modbus RTU communication:
Valid Modbus RTU message frame detected and wait
time for new communication not elapsed.
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
40 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
"CubicleBUS" LED
The "CubicleBUS" LED shows the status of the CubicleBUS communication of the COM16
module.
Table 3- 6 "CubicleBUS" LED
"CubicleBUS" LED Meaning
Off No CubicleBUS module found
Red CubicleBUS fault
Flashing green A CubicleBUS node has been found but no metering
function/metering function PLUS, and no trip unit
Steady green light CubicleBUS node found and connection with metering
function/metering function PLUS, and/or trip unit
Two LEDs must be considered for assessing a functional CubicleBUS in the switch:
● The "COMM" LED on the trip unit must be green, that is, at least one other CubicleBUS
node must be detected from the perspective of the trip unit.
At the least, this is only the metering function/metering function PLUS, if the CubicleBUS
has been subsequently interrupted.
● The CubicleBUS LED on the COM16 must then be considered. If this shows a steady
green light, there is a connection from the COM16 at least to the metering
function/metering function PLUS.
● If both LEDs show a green light (steady light from CubicleBUS on the COM16 module
and "COMM" on the trip unit), there is continuous communication between the trip unit,
the COM16 and Modbus RTU.
Data exchange via Modbus RTU
Data exchange then functions as follows:
● An up-to-date image of all the data of the SENTRON WL (with the exception of the
waveform buffer) is always stored in the COM16 module. Consequently, a data query
from the COM16 module to the PLC can be answered within just a few milliseconds.
● Write data from the PLC is forwarded to the correct addressee on the CubicleBUS.
SENTRON WL
3.2 COM16 and BSS module
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 41
Detecting the switch position
The COM16 module has three micro switches on the underside for determining the position
of a slide-in circuit breaker in the guide frame. Depending on which switch is actuated, the
position described above is communicated (1 = actuated). The table below gives the
definition of the position on:
Table 3- 7 COM16, micro switch
Switch position Rear switch (S46) Middle switch (S47) Front switch (S48)
Connected position 1 0 0
Test/check position 0 1 0
Disconnected position 0 0 1
Switch not present 0 0 0
When the circuit breaker is moved, the micro switch that has been actuated is released
before the next one is actuated. No micro switch is actuated in the intervening period. As far
as communication is concerned, this means that when the breaker is moved, the "old" status
is communicated until a new defined status is reached.
Once the "disconnected position" micro switch has been released, there is no way of
determining the direction in which the breaker is being moved.
If it is pushed in, the next position is the "test position". The COM16 communicates
"disconnected position" for a further 10 s until the "test position" switch is actuated and only
then "switch not present".
In the case of fixed-mounted circuit breakers, a counter plate is screwed to the COM16 and
this transfers the connected position.
3.2.5 Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
To display, for example, internal circuit breaker statuses on the control cabinet, or to read the
statuses via Modbus RTU, a BSS module must be installed along with the necessary
signaling switches. A requirement for this is that the circuit breaker has an electronic trip unit
of the type ETU45B / ETU745 or higher. All micro switches that receive the information on
the status of the circuit breaker are attached to the BSS or connected to it. The BSS makes
this digital information available on the CubicleBUS.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
42 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Retrofitting
A SENTRON WL can also be retrofitted with the BSS. The BSS acquires the following
information:
● Status of the spring energy store
● Position of the main contacts (switch on/off)
● Ready-to-close signaling
● Tripped signaling switch on the trip unit (connected with the red tripped plunger)
● Signaling switch on auxiliary trip unit
● Temperature in the circuit breaker dependent on the installation location in the switch (the
sensor is calibrated at the factory)
Note
Ordering data
The BSS is already included in the order option "Z=F12" (Modbus RTU communication).
If a BSS is desired without Modbus RTU communication (e.g. for operation of the
BDA PLUS), this can be specified when ordering the switch with the option "Z=F01", or it
can be ordered later as a spare part.
3.3 Metering functions
3.3.1 Metering function PLUS
The integral metering function PLUS can be operated with all trip units with CubicleBUS
connection. It extends the protection functions of the trip unit and provides further warning
thresholds and additional diagnostics options. With its extensive measured values, the
integral metering function PLUS in SENTRON WL is a good alternative to the external power
monitoring devices.
Metering function PLUS
The properties of the metering function PLUS are:
● In addition to the current values supplied by the trip unit, the metering function PLUS
provides all the necessary measured values in power distribution (voltage, power, etc.) to
enable power management.
● The metering function PLUS offers options for monitoring and protecting the connected
power distribution system using the extended protection function (e.g. overvoltage).
● The possibility of generating warnings when adjustable thresholds are exceeded enables
the very early response to plant faults or unusual plant statuses.
● Use of the metering function PLUS can increase plant availability.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 43
The figure below shows that the metering function PLUS is mounted on the rear of the trip
unit (ETU).
① Rear of the ETU
② Metering function PLUS
③ Connection for the breaker identification module
Figure 3-8 Metering function PLUS
Data exchange with trip unit
The trip unit and the metering function PLUS exchange all current data via a high-speed
synchronous interface. The metering function PLUS provides all connected modules (e.g.
COM16 or BDA PLUS) with the following data for further processing via the CubicleBUS:
● The parameters for the extended protection function
● The parameters for the threshold values
● The measured value settings
● The determined measured values
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
44 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Mounting
The metering function PLUS can be operated with all switches with ETU45B / ETU745 and
ETU76B / ETU776. If the metering function PLUS is ordered together with the circuit breaker
using the short code "Z=F05", it is already built-in and ready for operation. The metering
function PLUS can be retrofitted at any time if the switch is fitted with one of the above-listed
trip units. The metering function PLUS is screwed onto the trip unit and the CubicleBUS
cables are clicked into place.
NOTICE
If retrofitting is carried out by the customer, the metering function PLUS will not be
calibrated together with the trip unit, that is, the accuracy information in the table "Metering
function PLUS - Measured values for communication" cannot be guaranteed.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 45
Harmonic analysis
The metering function PLUS samples the applied currents and the voltage, saves the
measured values, and carries out a Fast Fourier Transformation. The result is the
percentage distribution of the harmonic oscillations up to the 29th harmonic. The determined
values are made available via the CubicleBUS and can be displayed via
powerconfig
from
Version 2.2 and BDA PLUS, and with BDA Plus they can be saved for later diagnostics as
an Excel-compatible "*.csv" file. In the case of the ETU76B/ETU776 trip unit, the measured
and calculated values can also be shown on the display.
Figure 3-9 Harmonic analysis
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
46 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Harmonics can be generated by the following:
● Domestic electronics, lighting and computers
● Single-phase power supply units
● Uninterruptible power supplies via inverters
● Saturated iron cores with inductances (transformers and reactors)
● Converters
● Rectifiers and inverters (especially in the case of speed-controlled asynchronous
machines)
● Induction and arc furnaces, welding equipment
● Spark erosion machines
The harmonic currents thus caused instigate voltage drops at the system reactances. These
result in significant overvoltages or power surges if there is a resonance condition due to
additional series resonant circuits or anti-resonant circuits.
Harmonic currents can cause the following problems in plants:
● Overload of the neutral conductor
● Overheating of transformers and reactors
● Overheating of cables and switching elements
● Overloading of compensation capacitors
● Voltage distortions
● Overheating and power-up difficulties for rotating-field motors
● Zero point faults
● Signal corruption on bus lines
Electronic component faults: Costs arising from:
● Insufficient system quality increases the risk of failure of plant sections and can result in
production standstills.
● If the provided power is exceeded, energy costs increase
● Faults in the open-loop and closed-loop control systems result in production faults and
failures
● Occurrence of luminance changes, flickering, lighting failure
● Defective compensation systems and thus plant standstill
● Spurious tripping of protection equipment can result in standstill of plant sections
● Overload of the transformer and the cable results in increased fire hazard
● Reduction in the service life of electronic components
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 47
If increased harmonics are measured, it is advisable to carry out a 3-phase system analysis.
This measurement, including the neutral conductor, must be carried out with the appropriate
harmonics measuring devices over an extended period up to the 100th harmonic. The right
choice of measuring connection point and professional analysis of the measured data are
essential components in developing a concept that removes or at least reduces the
harmonics and associated faults.
Standards
You can find further information in the EN 6100-2-4 standard where upper limits are defined
for harmonics. The application area of this standard refers to harmonics up to the
50th harmonic order, intermediate harmonics up to the 50th harmonic order, and voltage
components at higher frequencies above the 50th harmonic order.
Waveform buffer
The metering function PLUS has two independent waveform buffers (A and B) with which the
current measured values are captured and buffered for one second. The buffer is
continuously overwritten with the new measured values. If an event (trigger event) now
occurs, the 1 s measured values are saved for later analysis of the events.
Typically, the function is used for analyzing a short-circuit (trigger event). But other events
can also be analyzed.
Each of these waveform buffers has 8 channels, one each for the currents IL1, IL2, IL3, IN and
Ig as well as for the voltages UL1N, UL2N and UL3N. Each channel is sampled with a frequency
of 1.649 kHz, and the values are buffered for 1 s.
The waveform can be represented and exported with the BDA PLUS, for example.
Trigger event
Tripping operations, alarm signals and threshold warnings are available as trigger events so
that the voltage wave for an undervoltage trip can be recorded. The trigger event can be set
individually for each waveform buffer. In addition, the position in the stopped waveform buffer
at which the trigger should be located can be stored.
The relationship between pre-history and post-history can be set in this way. If the pre-
history of the trigger event is to be analyzed, the position can be set to 80%, for example. If
the event occurs, 0.8 of a second of pre-history and 0.2 of a second of post-history are
available in the waveform buffer, and an available COM16 adds a time stamp to the trigger
event.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
48 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Data export
The extensive analysis data (approximately 25 KB per waveform) can be downloaded and
analyzed with the BDA PLUS and the display of the ETU76B/ETU776. There are different
zoom options and export functions available depending on the program.
When downloading, you must first select which channels are necessary, since approximately
1 minute per channel is required for downloading. The time duration is explained partly
because, as well as recording the measured values, calculating the harmonics, and the
extended protection function, the metering function also has to carry out tasks with higher
priority and thus the communication process takes longer. Also, a large volume of data is
transferred. The progress of this process is indicated by a progress bar.
3.3.2 Voltage transformer
For safety reasons, a voltage transformer is used to operate the metering function PLUS.
This prevents voltage signals of up to 1 kV reaching the back of the ETU direct via the
auxiliary conductor connections.
The voltage transformer converts the high primary voltage to a secondary voltage between
100 V and 120 V, depending on the version.
Connection
On the primary side, the voltage converter can be star or delta-connected. On the secondary
side, it is always star-connected to the auxiliary conductor plug-in system (X8:5 to X8:8). The
figure below shows the connection of the voltage transformer for operating with a metering
function. On the primary side, the transformer can be star or delta-connected. Refer to the
Operating Instructions for details.
VHFRQGDU\ SULPDU\
;
;
;
;
D
E
F
Q
$
$
%
%
&
&
/
/
/
Figure 3-10 Connection of the voltage transformer for metering function
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 49
Maximum distance from voltage transformer
The maximum distance depends on the cross-section and the required accuracy class.
Assuming a cross-section of 1.5 mm2, the maximum distance from the voltage transformer is
50 m for Class 0.5, and 100 m for Class 3. If electromagnetic interference is expected,
shielded cables must be used.
Parameters for setting the measured value
To determine the measured values, the data of the voltage transformer must be taken into
account and set in the metering function. This includes:
● Primary voltage of the voltage transformer (factory setting: 400 V)
● Secondary voltage of the voltage transformer (factory setting: 100 V)
● Type of connection on the primary side (factory setting: star)
If the parameters have to be changed, the following setting options are available:
●
powerconfig
from Version 2.2
● With the BDA PLUS
● With the display of the ETU776/ETU76B
● Register address range 0x8001 (32769) to 0x8034 (32820)
Accuracy
The load of the metering function PLUS is 27 kΩ so that up to six metering functions can be
connected simultaneously to a voltage transformer with apparent power of 2.5 VA (note
accuracy class and cable length!).
The accuracy of the voltage transformer depends on the number of connected metering
functions per voltage transformer:
● Class 0.5 for 1 to 3 metering functions
● Class 3 for 4 to 6 metering functions
These specifications apply for ambient temperatures of 30 to 50 °C and a primary-side
voltage of 80 to 120% for a period of one year.
If the accuracy specified in the tables below has to be achieved, a Class 0.5 voltage
transformer must be used. As well as the measured values specified in the table, the
metering function also provides a minimum and maximum measured value.
Note
If the metering function is retrofitted at the customer end, the specified accuracy values
cannot be guaranteed due to lack of calibration with the trip unit.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
50 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Table 3- 8 Metering function PLUS - Measured values for communication
Measured value Range of values Accuracy (when
ordering the switch + trip
unit + metering function
PLUS direct) 1
Currents IL1 / IL2 / IL3, In 30 … 8000 A ± 1 %
Ground-fault current Ig (measurement with
external G transformer)
100 … 1200 A ± 5 %
Phase-to-phase voltages UL12, UL23, UL31 80 … 120% Un ± 1 %
Star point voltages UL1N, UL2N, UL3N 80 … 120% Un ± 1 %
Instantaneous mean value of the phase-to-phase
voltages ULlavg
80 … 120% Un ± 1 %
Instantaneous means value of the star point
voltages ULnavg
80 … 120% Un ± 1 %
Apparent power SL1, SL2, SL3 13 … 8000 kVA ± 2 %
Total apparent power Stotal 13 … 24000 kVA ± 2 %
Active power PL1, PL2, PL3 – 8000 … 8000 kW ± 2% (cos φ > 0.6)
Total active power Ptotal – 24000 … 24000 kVA ± 2% (cos φ > 0.6)
Reactive power QL1, QL2, QL3 – 6400 … 6400 kvar ± 4% (cos φ > 0.6)
Total reactive power Qtotal – 20000 … 20000 kvar ± 4% (cos φ > 0.6)
Power factors cos φL1, cos φL2, cos φL3 – 0,6 … 1 … 0.6 ± 0.04
Power factors cos φavg – 0,6 … 1 … 0.6 ± 0.04
Long-time mean value of currents IL1, IL2, IL3 30 … 8000 A ± 1 %
Long-time mean value of 3-phase current 30 … 8000 A ± 1 %
Long-time mean value of active power PL1, PL2,
PL3
13 … 8000 kW ± 2% (cos φ > 0.6)
Long-time mean value of 3-phase active power 13 … 8000 kW ± 2% (cos φ > 0.6)
Long-time mean value of apparent power SL1,
SL2, SL3
13 … 8000 kW ± 2 %
Long-time mean value of 3-phase apparent
power
13 … 8000 kW ± 2 %
Long-time mean value of 3-phase reactive power – 24000 … 24000 kvar ± 4% (cos φ > 0.6)
Active energy in normal direction 1 … 10000 MWh ± 2 %
Active energy in reverse direction 1 … 10000 MWh ± 2 %
Reactive energy in normal direction 1 … 10000 Mvarh ± 4 %
Reactive energy in reverse direction 1 … 10000 Mvarh ± 4 %
Frequency 15 … 440 Hz ± 0.1 Hz
THD for current and voltage 2 … 100 % ± 3% from the
measuring range to the
29th harmonic
Current and voltage phase unbalance 2 … 150 % ± 1 %
1 Accuracy is specified as follows: ± (x%) of the full-scale value + 2 LSD (least significant digit) for
one year after calibration; use of a Class 0.5 voltage transformer as well as connection of no more
than 3 SENTRON WLs to this voltage transformer.
SENTRON WL
3.3 Metering functions
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 51
Table 3- 9 Reference conditions:
Input current Inmax ± 1%
Input voltage Un ± 1%
Frequency f = 50 Hz
Power factor cos φ = 1
Waveform Sine, THD ≤ 5%; symmetrical load
Ambient temperature 35 °C ± 5 °C
Auxiliary voltage 24 V DC in accordance with
DIN 19240/EN 61131
Warm-up time 2 hours
Relative humidity Up to 90%
Interfering fields None
Current 0.2 … 1.2 Inmax Measuring range:
Voltage 0.8 … 1.2 Unmax
Extended protection function
Additional tripping criteria can be set via the protection function of the metering function
PLUS. A parameterized delay time can achieve "debouncing" of briefly occurring events.
With this, the switch only trips if the set event persists longer than the delay time.
The extended protection function of the metering function PLUS can monitor the following
criteria and trigger the trip unit when limits are exceeded:
Table 3- 10 Protection function of the metering function PLUS
Parameters Setting range Possible delay
Phase unbalance current 5 … 50 % 0 … 15 s
THD current 5 … 50 % 5 … 15 s
Phase unbalance voltage 5 … 50 % 0 … 15 s
Undervoltage 100 … 1100 V 0 … 15 s
Overvoltage 200 … 1200 V 0 … 15 s
THD voltage 3 … 50 % 5 … 15 s
Direction of rotation of phase – –
Active power in normal direction 1 … 12000 kW 0 … 15 s
Active power in reverse direction 1 … 12000 kW 0 … 15 s
Underfrequency 40 … 70 Hz 0 … 15 s
Overfrequency 40 … 70 Hz 0 … 15 s
SENTRON WL
3.4 Functions and parameters
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
52 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.3.3 Delay of the threshold warning
You can parameterize whether a warning is generated when a threshold value is violated.
This can be delayed like the extended protection function. These warnings are
communicated on the CubicleBUS (e.g. for the configurable output module or as a trigger for
the waveform buffer) and transferred via the COM16.
Table 3- 11 Threshold values of the metering function
Parameters Setting range Possible delay
Overcurrent 30 … 10000 A 0 … 255 s
Overcurrent ground fault 30 … 12000 A 0 … 255 s
Overcurrent N-conductor 30 … 10000 A 0 … 255 s
Phase unbalance current 5 … 50 % 0 … 255 s
Long-tirm mean value of current 30 … 10000 A 0 … 255 s
THD current 5 … 50 % 5 … 255 s
Undervoltage 100 … 1100 V 0 … 255 s
Overvoltage 100 … 1100 V 0 … 255 s
Phase unbalance voltage 3 … 50 % 0 … 255 s
THD voltage 3 … 50 % 5 … 255 s
Peak factor and form factor 1 … 2.55 0 … 255 s
Active power in normal direction 1 … 12000 kW 0 … 255 s
Active power in reverse direction 1 … 12000 kW 0 … 255 s
Power factor, capacitive - 0,999 … – 1.000 0 … 255 s
Power factor, inductive - 0,999 … – 1.000 0 … 255 s
Long-time mean value of active power 1 … 12000 kW 0 … 255 s
Apparent power 1 … 12000 kVA 0 … 255 s
Reactive power in normal direction 1 … 12000 kvar 0 … 255 s
Reactive power in reverse direction 1 … 12000 kvar 0 … 255 s
Long-time mean value of apparent power 1 … 12000 kVA 0 … 255 s
Long-time mean value of reactive power 1 … 12000 kvar 0 … 255 s
Underfrequency 40 … 70 Hz 0 … 255 s
Overfrequency 40 … 70 Hz 0 … 255 s
3.4 Functions and parameters
3.4.1 Important functions and parameters for communication
Thanks to their modular design and many diverse modules, the SENTRON WL circuit
breakers provide an extremely large range of functions far beyond that of strict protection
functions. This includes, for example, load management, threshold values, or additional
tripping conditions of the extended protection function. These functions can also be utilized
without communication.
SENTRON WL
3.4 Functions and parameters
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 53
3.4.2 Load management
Load management is used to avoid peaks in the load curve or to reduce their effects. Brief
peaks can result in a circuit breaker overload and thus a tripping operation, or they can result
in the energy supplier raising the price. Energy prices are generally calculated based on the
maximum consumption values. Brief peaks can result in assignment to another tariff group
and thus a higher energy price.
From trip unit ETU45B / ETU745, the SENTRON WL provides two current thresholds for
local load management. Load shedding is the upper threshold, and load pick up is the lower
threshold. Both values can be used locally, or in higher-level systems such as a PLC, to
briefly shut down parts of the loads (e.g. air conditioners) so that the peaks in the load curve
are reduced.
The figure below explains the functional principle of the load management functions "load
shedding" and "load pick up". This is based on a circuit breaker with an overload parameter
of 1000 A.
:DUQLQJORDGVKHGGLQJ
2XWJRLQJ
,QFRPLQJ
&XUUHQWRIRQHSKDVH
3DUDPHWHUORDGSLFNXS$
2XWJRLQJ
,QFRPLQJ
:DUQLQJORDGVKHGGLQJ
3DUDPHWHUORDGVKHGGLQJ$
$
$
$
$
$
$ W
W
[
W
[
W
[
W
[
Figure 3-11 Load management functions: Load shedding and load pick up
Important: Violation of the upper or lower thresholds never results in a circuit breaker trip and
instead only generates a message!
SENTRON WL
3.4 Functions and parameters
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
54 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Threshold "load shedding"
If the current exceeds the set load shedding parameter in one phase, a "load shedding
alarm" is generated. Only when this lower threshold is violated by all three phases is the
"load shedding alarm" reset. These alarm messages are displayed direct as alarms in the
BDA PLUS and they result in a yellow background in the status screen in the main overview.
However, they are also channeled into the event log and are provided with a time stamp
there.
Note
The event log is only available with COM16.
Threshold "load pick up"
The opposite applies for the load pick up threshold. If all three phases fall below the set
parameters, a "load pick up alarm" is generated. If only one of the three currents exceeds
the value of the parameter, the "load pick up alarm" is reset.
Delay time tx
To prevent these messages being generated by brief current peaks and troughs, they can be
delayed by the delay time tx from 1 s to 15 s.
Where can the parameters be set?
The parameters for load management can be found in the parameter tree of BDA PLUS and
powerconfig
under "Device parameters – Switch – Protection function – Supplement".
Local switching signals
The signals load shedding/load pick up are available as outputs on the digital output module
with rotary coding switch for automatically shutting down and connecting loads. The
configurable output module can also be set in such a way as to output the load shedding and
load pick up status.
3.4.3 Extended protection function
The extended protection function metering function PLUS adds further tripping criteria to
those of the trip unit. If an additional tripping condition from the extended protection function
is activated (e.g. phase unbalance voltage > 8%), this always results in a tripping operation
that the metering function initiates via the trip unit.
The options specified in the table "Protection function of the metering function PLUS" in
Chapter Voltage transformer (Page 48) are available as additional monitoring criteria.
SENTRON WL
3.4 Functions and parameters
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 55
3.4.4 Threshold values
As well as the load management facility (load shedding/load pick up), the metering function
PLUS provides another option for automatic monitoring of operating data and for generating
an alarm when a normal status is exited.
In general, the same monitoring functions are available for the threshold values as for the
extended protection function. The greatest difference, however, is that the violation of a
threshold never results in a tripping operation.
Together with the extended protection function, two thresholds can thus be defined (e.g. for
overvoltage). With the lower of the two, only an alarm is generated via the threshold function
(e.g. > 410 V), and if the voltage continues to rise, a tripping operation is triggered (e.g.
> 430 V).
3.4.5 Lower limit of power transmission
Despite extremely high accuracy in recording the current over a large dynamic range, a fault
current is generated with a switch with high rated current (e.g. 4000 A) at 1% accuracy in the
lower range. One possible result of this is that when the switch is off (main contacts opened),
a current flow of up to 40 A can be displayed and transferred via the communication system.
To avoid this, it is possible to convert all recorded current values less than or equal to this
parameter to zero using the parameter "Lower limit of power transmission". The factory
setting for this value is 50 A. This means all values less than or equal to 50 A will appear on
the display as 0 and will be used as 0 for internal calculations (power), and transferred as 0
via the communication system.
If this parameter is changed to 0, this function is switched off and all recorded measured
current values are used direct.
The parameter for this can be found in the parameter tree of BDA PLUS or
powerconfig
under "Device parameters – Switch – Measured value settings".
3.4.6 Direction of incoming supply
The direction of "flow" of the energy at a given time, or how much energy has "flowed" in
both directions until now, is important above all for coupling switches. It is necessary here to
define a "normal direction". This can be either "top down" or "bottom up".
Depending on this, the measured active power values have a positive sign (in normal
direction) or a negative sign (in reverse direction). The measured currents, by contrast,
always have a positive sign!
The transferred energy values flow into two counters, active energy in the normal direction
and active energy in the reverse direction. Neither energy counter has a sign.
SENTRON WL
3.4 Functions and parameters
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
56 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.4.7 Events and tripping operations
All events (with the exception of tripping operations) are provided with a time stamp and an
incoming (+) or outgoing (–) indicator, and entered in the event log.
In the event log, the last ten events registered on the CubicleBUS are stored in the COM16.
The trip log contains the last five tripping operations. Both can be evaluated via the
BDA PLUS or
powerconfig
.
Events
Tripping operations
The event log has a depth of ten events and works like a FIFO memory, that is, when a new
event arrives, the last event is removed from the event log.
The trip log functions in a similar way to the event log, but only the last five tripping
operations are entered with a time stamp. An incoming or outgoing message is unnecessary
in this case.
Note
The event log and the trip log are only available with the COM16 module.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 57
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3.5.1 General information
General (description and equipment)
External CubicleBUS modules enable communication of the SENTRON WL circuit breaker
with secondary devices in the circuit breaker field. It can be used, for example, to control
analog indicators, to transfer alarms and the reason for tripping the circuit breaker, and to
read in additional control signals. With the help of one of these modules, a Zone Selective
Interlocking can also be implemented for short circuits.
Five different CubicleBUS modules can output data from the CubicleBUS system.
All external CubicleBUS modules have the same housing. The CubicleBUS can be
connected to X1 and X2 with an RJ45 connector, or it can be connected to X3. This depends
on whether or not a COM16 is available.
① LED
② Rotary coding switch
③ X1: CubicleBUS
④ X2: CubicleBUS
⑤ X3: CubicleBUS
⑥ X5: Inputs/outputs
⑦ X4: Inputs/outputs
⑧ Push to trip button
Figure 3-12 External CubicleBUS module
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
58 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.5.1.1 Rotary coding switch
With the exception of the configurable output module, all external CubicleBUS modules are
configured using rotary coding switches.
The function indicated by the pointer of the rotary coding switch is active in each case. On
some modules (e.g. digital output module) you must first consider the group selection (e.g.
"1st Module" in the left position; color-coded) and then any additional meaning (e.g. time
delay). The sections for the individual modules contain more detailed information.
In the figure below, the rotary coding switch has been set as follows:
① 0.2 = delay of 0.2 s
② Switch position left = Module 1
Figure 3-13 Rotary coding switch setting on the CubicleBUS module - Delay time [s]
3.5.1.2 Installing the CubicleBUS modules
The external CubicleBUS modules are snapped onto a standard 35 mm DIN rail in the
switching panel. You must note that the length of the connecting cable of the first module to
the circuit breaker must not exceed 2 m.
For connecting the CubicleBUS modules to each other and to the circuit breaker, only the
pre-assembled cables supplied or separately ordered should to be used. These cables
enable both the communication of the CubicleBUS modules and their 24 V DC supply.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 59
3.5.1.3 Connection of the power supply
The CubicleBUS must be supplied once with 24 V DC along its length. The connections X8:3
and X8:4 or the 4-pin connectors of the external CubicleBUS modules (X3) can be used for
this purpose. The 24 V are transferred over the CubicleBUS cables. The required power of
the 24 V DC supply depends on the configuration of the CubicleBUS. The technical data of
the external CubicleBUS modules is listed in this chapter. The control system of the
CubicleBUS must be connected to a secure power supply because in the event of a short
circuit the system voltage reverts to an unspecified value.
Note
Hot plugging (hot swapping) of CubicleBUS cables/modules is not permitted.
The CubicleBUS is supplied with 24 V DC on X3. The table below shows the pin assignment
of X3 on the CubicleBUS module:
Table 3- 12 Pin assignment of the X3 on the CubicleBUS module
X3:1 Ground 24 V DC
X3:2 CubicleBUS communication cable -
X3:3 CubicleBUS communication cable +
X3:4 +24 V DC
3.5.1.4 Maximum configuration of the CubicleBUS
The CubicleBUS can comprise up to 13 nodes.
These include:
● Trip unit ETU
● Metering function PLUS
● Breaker Status Sensor (BSS)
● COM16
● BDA PLUS
● ZSI module
● Digital output module with switch position left (1st module)
● Digital output module with switch position right (2nd module)
● Digital configurable output module
● Digital input module with switch position left
● Digital input module with switch position right
● Analog output module with switch position left (1st module)
● Analog output module with switch position right (2nd module)
In practice, only one selection of these modules is usually necessary
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
60 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.5.1.5 Installation guidelines for the CubicleBUS
The following guidelines apply for installing the CubicleBUS:
● Total length of the CubicleBUS cables max. 10 m.
● Only the pre-assembled cables must be used for connecting the CubicleBUS modules.
● At the last module, the cable must be terminated with a terminating resistor of 120 Ω,
which is included with every module.
● The cables must always be connected from module to module. Spur lines are not
permissible!
● The power supply must be ensured with a 24 V DC power supply with the usual tolerance
and the properties listed in Chapter External current consumption with CubicleBUS
(Page 80).
● If a ZSI module is used, it must be connected as the first external module.
3.5.1.6 Connection of external CubicleBUS modules
Note
Selecting the power supply
A sufficient external power supply of 24 V DC must be ensured. You can find additional
information on this in Chapter External current consumption with CubicleBUS (Page 80).
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 61
Connection of the CubicleBUS without COM16
The figure below shows the connection of external CubicleBUS modules to the
SENTRON WL without COM16.
● Make the first connection with four wires.
● Connect the CubicleBUS with RJ45 connectors using the supplied CubicleBUS cables.
● Connect the power supply to the X3 interface.
PD[P
;
; ; ; ;
; ;
① Connecting cable to the first module
② Connecting cables between the modules
③ Terminating resistor 120 Ω 0.5 W on the last module
④ CubicleBUS modules
⑤ Cable connection for power supply with 24 V DC
Figure 3-14 Connection of the CubicleBUS without COM16
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
62 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Connection of the CubicleBUS with COM16
The figure below shows the connection of external CubicleBUS modules to the
SENTRON WL with COM16:
● Connect the external CubicleBUS modules using the supplied 0.5 m CubicleBUS cables
and integrate them into the system.
● Provide the CubicleBUS with a terminating resistor.
● Connect the power supply to the X3 interface.
; ; ; ;
; ;
; PD[P
① Only with more than 2 CubicleBUS modules: Connecting cable between X8 and the first CubicleBUS module for
power supply with 24 V DC
② Connecting cables between the CubicleBUS modules
③ Terminating resistor 120 Ω 0.5 W on the last module
④ Last CubicleBUS module
⑤ Connecting cables between the CubicleBUS modules for power supply with 24 V DC
⑥ Connecting cable between COM16 and 1st CubicleBUS module (with two RJ45 connectors)
⑦ COM16
⑧ Wire four cables to X8
Figure 3-15 Connection of CubicleBus with COM16
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 63
3.5.1.7 LED indicator
The LEDs on the external CubicleBUS modules enable simple diagnostics and testing of the
module. As explained in the tables below, the internal status and the communication
connection can be diagnosed and thus the correct cabling can be checked.
The tables below provide an overview of the LED indicators:
"DEVICE" LED
The "DEVICE" LED indicates the status of the external CubicleBUS module:
Table 3- 13 "DEVICE" LED
"DEVICE" LED Meaning
Red Internal fault in the CubicleBUS module
Yellow CubicleBUS module in test/force mode
Green Module in operation
CubicleBUS LED
The CubicleBUS LED on the external CubicleBUS modules indicates whether there is a
communication relationship with other modules:
Table 3- 14 "CubicleBUS" LED
"CubicleBUS" LED Meaning
Green There is a connection to another CubicleBUS module.
Off No other CubicleBUS module detected.
Other LEDs
All other LEDs indicate whether the outputs are set or the inputs are supplied with 24 V DC
and have thus been activated.
Table 3- 15 LEDs
All other LEDs Meaning
Yellow • On the input module this means a high signal at the relevant input.
• On digital output modules, the output is active and the contact is closed.
• On the analog output module, a yellow LED indicates either that the full-
scale deflection value has been exceed by 20% (in the case of U, I, P),
or cos phi is greater than 0.8,
or the frequency is greater than 45 Hz.
Off If none of the above listed statuses apply, the LED is off.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
64 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.5.1.8 Test of the digital input and output modules
To prevent malfunctions of the circuit breaker or one of its components, the test must only be
carried out before commissioning. The correct functioning of the CubicleBUS modules can
be checked in test mode. A distinction must be made between the individual modules.
Carry out test mode
● Test mode is started by pressing the "Test" button on the CubicleBUS module once.
● All inputs or outputs and the associated LEDs are then switched off.
● The color of the DEVICE LED changes from green to yellow.
● Repeated pressing of the "Test" button when the LED is switched on causes the relevant
input or output to be switched on and off alternately.
● On the input module, the signals are also transferred via the CubicleBUS as well as the
LEDs of the inputs, and then to any connected MODBUS.
● In the case of the digital outputs, the LEDs and associated outputs in each case are
switched through. This enables checking of the connected devices.
"Forcing"
The inputs of the input module, the outputs of the output module, the ZSI input and the ZSI
output can be "forced" via the communication system of the BDA PLUS. This means test
mode can be switched on via the communication system and the inputs or outputs can be
overwritten for test purposes.
If the "Test" key is not pressed for longer than 30 s, or no change is triggered via the
communication system, test mode is automatically canceled.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 65
Testing process
The table below shows the testing process for checking the digital inputs and outputs on the
CubicleBUS.
Table 3- 16 Testing process for the digital inputs/outputs on the CubicleBUS
Normal operation
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Normal operating status of the input module or
output module. The inputs or outputs are on or
off according to the wiring or the pending
signals.
Press "Test" button
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
The module then switches to test mode,
indicated by the yellow DEVICE LED.
Press "Test" button
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 1 is selected by pressing once.
This is indicated by the green LED 1.
Following this, the output can be switched on
or off alternately, or the on or off signal of the
input can be transferred by quickly pressing
the "Test" button (1 s).
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 2 selected. As under 1, the
output can be switched by quickly pressing
the button. On relay modules, a click can be
heard.
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 3 selected. On input modules,
the presence of 24 V DC is simulated at the
relevant input and transferred via c.
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 4 selected. Fast pressing of
the "Test" button tests the selected input or
output.
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 5 selected. Fast pressing of
the "Test" button tests the selected input or
output.
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
Input or output 6 selected. Fast pressing of
the "Test" button tests the selected input or
output.
After a pause of longer
than 2 s, press the
"Test" button.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
LED overall test. If the "Test" button is not
pressed again within 5 s, test mode is
canceled.
Press the "Test" button
within 5 s.
'(9,&(
&XELFOH%86
The test run can start from the beginning.
Shows a yellow light
Shows a green light
Not lit
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
66 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.5.2 Digital input module
Up to two digital input modules can be operated simultaneously on a CubicleBUS, once as a
module with the position "PROFIBUS INPUT" and once as a "PARAMETER SWITCH". The
polarity of the inputs is not important.
Note
The digital input module can also be operated in MODBUS with the switch position
"PROFIBUS Input", in which case it makes the data available on the MODBUS.
Input module function
The digital input module offers connections for up to six additional binary signals (24 V DC).
The signals are transferred direct via MODBUS and processed at the fieldbus level. Such
signals include:
● The status of a Buchholz relay
● The open/closed signal of the control cabinet door
● Violation of a specified temperature
● The status of an MCCB without direct communication capability or of a switch
disconnector can also be transferred on MODBUS.
These protective devices can also be switched in conjunction with the configurable output
module, resulting in a low-cost alternative to other solutions with additional MODBUS
input/output modules.
Switch position "PROFIBUS INPUT"
In switch position "PROFIBUS INPUT", a total of six inputs are available.
Switch position "PARAMETER SWITCH"
If the rotary coding switch is in position "PARAMETER SWITCH", there are also six inputs
available, but in this configuration the first input has the effect of changing the active
parameter set. If the connected ETU does not have two parameter sets (e.g. ETU45B /
ETU745), this input can also be used without restriction.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 67
Rotary coding switch
The position of the rotary coding switch selects the operating mode.
PROFIBUS
INPUT
PAR AME TER
SWITCH
Figure 3-16 Digital input module
3.5.2.1 Parameter set changeover
There are two different parameter sets for the protection function in the ETU76B / ETU776
trip unit. This protection function is necessary when switching between mains operation and
generator operation in the event of a power failure, and there is the possibility of all tripping
conditions changing.
Changeover
Changeover between the two parameter sets can be made by means of:
● Modbus RTU communication
● BDA PLUS
● Display in the ETU76B / ETU776
● Digital input module
Since the CubicleBUS is an event-driven bus, the ETU76B / ETU776 trip unit switches to the
other parameter set when a changeover request is made via the CubicleBUS.
This means, if a changeover is made to parameter set B via the BDA PLUS, for example,
although the input on the digital input module is at "0" (parameter set A), the active
parameter set in the trip unit changes to parameter set B. Only when the input on the digital
input module is set to "1" and then back again to "0" is an event for changing to parameter
set A initiated on the CubicleBUS.
For this purpose, the first input on the module is used in the position "PARAMETER
SWITCH" of the rotary coding switch. If a "1" signal (LED on input 1 is yellow) is detected
there, changeover to parameter set B is signaled to the trip unit. If the input signal changes
back to "0", changeover to parameter set A is communicated and the LED at input 1 goes
out.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
68 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.5.2.2 Technical data
The table below contains the technical data of the digital input module on the CubicleBUS:
Table 3- 17 Technical data of the digital input module
Operating voltage on the CubicleBUS min./max. (V) 19.2 / 28.8
Current consumption from the CubicleBUS min./max. (mA) 29 / 43
Number of isolated channels per digital input module 6
Voltage value for reliable detection of a "1" signal (V) > 16 V
Current consumption per input at a "1" signal (mA) 7.5
Voltage value for reliable detection of a "0" signal (V) < 1 V
Current consumption per input at a "0" signal (mA) 0
Maximum number of modules possible on one CubicleBUS 2
Power loss min./max. (W) 0.72 / 0.94
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70 / 86 / 95
Weight (kg) 0.223
Temperature range (°C) -20 / 60
3.5.3 Digital output module with rotary coding switch
Six binary information items about the switch status (alarms and tripping operations) can be
output via the digital output module to external signaling devices (e.g. indicator lights, horns),
or used for selective shutdown of other plant units (e.g. frequency converters).
The switch position on the left selects the events in the adjacent dark-gray field, and the
switch position on the right selects the events in the adjacent light-gray field.
$/$50
35(75,3
78(55
/'6+('
/'5(67
7(03
,81%$/
Figure 3-17 Digital output module
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 69
Versions
The current carrying capacity of an output is 150 mA here, and the maximum voltage is 24 V
DC. Only direct voltage can be switched. The output module offers a changeover contact in
each case with a maximum load of up to 12 A. Voltages to 230 V and AC voltage are
possible. In addition, the relay contacts are isolated.
Load shedding message
By means of the load shedding and load pick up signals, a load can be switched off or
connected automatically, dependent on the capacity utilization of the circuit breaker. This is
the first stage of energy management.
Configuration
The configuration of the module is set using a rotary coding switch that selects one of the
two output assignments as well as the associated delay time.
Switch position left
If the rotary coding switch is set to one of the positions in the left dark-gray field, the outputs
1 to 6 are assigned the subsequent event signals:
1. Tripping operation due to overload (L)
2. Short-time delayed short-circuit release (S)
3. Instantaneous short-circuit release (I)
4. Ground-fault tripping (G)
5. Ground-fault alarm signal
6. Tripping operation due to overload in the neutral conductor (N)
Switch position right
If the rotary coding switch is set to one of the positions in the right light-gray field, the outputs
1 to 6 are assigned the following functions:
1. Leading signal of overload trip (delay time 0 s)
2. Fault in trip unit (ETU)
3. Load shedding
4. Load pick up
5. Temperature alarm
6. Phase unbalance current
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
70 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Delay time
As well as the assignment of the outputs, an additional delay time can be set using the rotary
coding switch. 0/0.2 s/0.5 s/1 s and 2 s are available. This can be used, for example, to
suppress briefly occurring events and to output these only after they are pending for longer
(e.g. phase unbalance). The leading overload trip signal that can be used for advance
shutdown and protection of connected frequency converters is independent of the set delay
time and is always instantaneous.
Maximum assignment on the CubicleBUS
Up to two digital output modules with rotary coding switches can be operated simultaneously
on a CubicleBUS. For this purpose, these must be configured once in the operating mode
switch position left and once in the operating mode switch position right.
LED indicators
The LEDs indicate the current status of the six outputs. If an LED is off, the associated
output is not set. If the output is activated, the LED shows a yellow light.
3.5.3.1 Technical data
The table below contains the technical data of the digital output module with rotary coding
switch on the CubicleBUS:
Table 3- 18 Technical data of the digital output module with rotary coding switch
Operating voltage on the CubicleBUS min./max. (V) 19.2 / 28.8
Current consumption from the CubicleBUS min./max. (mA) relay 29 / 250
Number of isolated channels per digital output module 6
Max. possible aggregate current of all 6 outputs;
relay output at 24 V DC/250 V AC/250 V DC (A)
10 / 10 / 2.5
Max. possible current on relay outputs per channel at 24 V DC (A) 2.7
Maximum number of modules possible on one CubicleBUS 2
Power loss min./max. (W) 0.74 / 5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70 / 86 / 95
Weight (kg) relay 0.321
Temperature range (°C) – 20 / 60
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 71
3.5.4 Configuration of the digital output module
3.5.4.1 Technical data
The table below shows the technical data of the digital configurable output module on the
CubicleBUS:
Table 3- 19 Technical data of the digital configurable output module
Operating voltage on the CubicleBUS min./max. (V) 19.2 / 28.8
Current consumption from the CubicleBUS min./max. (mA) 29/39 (250 rel.)
Number of isolated channels per digital output module 6
Max. possible current per channel with 24 V DC relay 2.7
Max. aggregate current (6 channels) relay at
24 V DC/250 V AC/250 V DC (A)
10 / 10 / 2.5
Maximum number of modules on one Cubicle 1
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.74 / 5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70 / 86 / 95
Weight (kg)/relay 0.321
Temperature range (°C) – 20 / 60
Digital configurable output module
The digital configurable output module has six outputs. The outputs are configured
exclusively using the
powerconfig
software.
Figure 3-18 Digital configurable output module
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
72 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Configuration
Configuration In contrast to the modules with rotary coding switch, the outputs are assigned
per software instead of by means of a selector switch. BDA PLUS or
powerconfig
is available
as configuration software.
With this tool, a separate "Config. output module" node is available in the navigation tree.
The events listed in the adjacent table can be assigned to the outputs via these nodes using
drop-down fields.
Assigning the outputs
The first three outputs of the module can be assigned up to six events that are connected to
the output via an OR logic operation. This allows, for example, the implementation of a group
signal if the switch is in overload excitation or if a warning for phase unbalance is present.
The last three outputs can only be assigned one of the events direct.
Events
Status messages, alarms, tripped signals, threshold violation signals, triggers of the
waveform buffer, bits that are directly addressable via MODBUS, and the active parameter
set are available as events for configuration.
Control via MODBUS
The outputs of the module can be set direct via MODBUS (by a PLC, for example) via the
MODBUS bits that are transferred via the high byte of register 17671 (0x4507) (see Chapter
Register block RB 69 status of the modules (Page 187)). Together with the digital input
module, it is possible to integrate switchgear that does not have direct communication
capability into a communication system.
Status detection
The status can be read in via the input module. With this, for example, a motorized operating
mechanism could be switched on or off via the digital configurable output module. However,
many other diverse applications are conceivable.
Threshold delay
In contrast to the digital output module with rotary coding switch, it is not possible to add a
time delay to the event. If, for example, a threshold value is to be output with a delay via the
digital configurable output module, this can only be achieved by delaying the threshold value.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 73
3.5.4.2 LED indicator
As on the digital output module with rotary coding switch, this module also indicates the
status of the outputs via the labeled LEDs. The table below contains a list of all events on the
CubicleBUS that can be output via the digital configurable output module.
These events are available to the digital configurable output module
Table 3- 20 Events on the CubicleBUS
Switch on
Switch off
Spring energy store compressed
Ready for closing
General warning
General tripping operation
Write protection active
Status
Communications OK
Overload
Overload in neutral conductor
Load shedding
Load pick up
Ground-fault alarm
Overtemperature
ETU fault
Alarms
Phase unbalance current
Overload (L)
Short-time delayed short circuit (S)
Instantaneous short circuit (I)
Ground fault (G)
Overload in neutral conductor (N)
Phase unbalance current
Phase unbalance voltage
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
Active power in normal direction
Active power in reverse direction
THD current
THD voltage
Tripping operations
Reverse direction of rotation of phase
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
74 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Communication bit 1
Communication bit 2
Communication bit 3
Communication bit 4
Communication bit 5
Communication bits
Communication bit 6
Parameter set A active Active parameter set
Parameter set B active
Overcurrent
Overcurrent in neutral conductor
Overcurrent ground fault
Phase unbalance current
Phase unbalance voltage
Long-tirm mean value of current
Undervoltage
Overvoltage
THD current
THD voltage
Peak factor
Form factor
Underfrequency
Overfrequency
Active power in normal direction
Active power in reverse direction
Apparent power
Reactive power in normal direction
Reactive power in reverse direction
Power factor, capacitive
Power factor, inductive
Long-time mean value of active power
Long-time mean value of reactive power
Threshold values
Long-time mean value of apparent power
Waveform buffer A Occurred trigger event
Waveform buffer B
3.5.5 Analog output module
Via the analog output module, the most important measured values made available via the
CubicleBUS can be output to analog indicator instruments, e.g. rotary coil instruments, in the
control cabinet door. Four channels are available in each analog output module for this
purpose. The signals are available at two physical interfaces, a 4 - 20 mA interface and a 0 -
10 V interface.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 75
Interfaces
The measured values can be picked up in the form of 0 - 10 V via the X4 connector on the
CubicleBUS module, and the 4 - 20 mA interface is available on the X5 connector. Both
output forms are always active simultaneously.
Figure 3-19 Analog output module
3.5.5.1 Selecting the measured values
The measured values output via the four analog channels are selected using a rotary coding
switch. The output forms I, V, P, f and cos ϕ are available. The selection box of the rotary
coding switch is divided vertically. If the switch is set to a value in the left half, the module is
automatically addressed as Module 1, so any second module must then be set to a value in
the right half. Only in this way is simultaneous operation with two analog output modules
possible.
Maximum assignment
Up to 2 analog output modules can be operated on one CubicleBUS.
Indicators
All rotary coil instruments with an inner flow resistance of more than 20 kΩ (as voltage
output) and between 50 Ω and 250 Ω (as current output) can be used as indicator. The LEDs
for the cannels show a yellow light when the current value exceeds 20% of the full-scale
deflection value (in the case of V, I, P), or cos ϕ is greater than 0.8, or the frequency is
greater than 45 Hz.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
76 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Switch position "I"
If the rotary coding switch is at switch position "I", the measured current values are output
linearly:
A01: Current in phase IL1
A02: Current in phase IL2
A03: Current in phase IL3
A04: Current in neutral conductor
Calculation of full-scale value
Since the circuit breaker can be designed for different rated currents, there must be
automatic scaling to the full-scale value, or interpretation of the maximum output value of the
analog output module. The value of the currently used rating plug is used for this.
The maximum value is calculated by multiplying the value of the rating plug by 1.2 and then
rounding up to the nearest 100.
Example: With a rating plug of 1600 A, the full-scale value of the rotary coil instrument must
be 2000 A (1600 x 1.2 = 1920 ⇒ 2000 A). That is, 0 V/4 mA correspond to 0 A, 10 V/20 mA
correspond to 2000 A.
Switch position "V"
If the rotary coding switch is at switch position "V", the following
voltages will be applied to the four analog outputs:
A01: External conductor voltage VL12
A02: External conductor voltage VL23
A03: External conductor voltage VL31
A04: Phase-to-neutral voltage VL1N
In most cases, the external conductor voltages are indicated on the control cabinet doors.
For this reason, the first three channels are assigned these measured values. If the voltage
is required between a phase and the neutral conductor, it is available via the output.
The full-scale deflection value for the rotary coil instrument is derived by multiplying the rated
voltage of the system by 1.1 and then rounding up to the nearest 50 value.
Example: The rated voltage of the system is 400 V. The full-scale value is then 450 V
(400 V x 1.1 = 440 V ⇒ 450 V).
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 77
Switch position "P"
If the rotary coding switch is at the "P" position, the measured values of the power are output
via the four channels:
A01: Active power phase PL1
A02: Active power phase PL2
A03: Active power phase PL3
A04: Total apparent power Stotal
To calculate the full-scale deflection value of the active power per phase, the value of the
rating plug must be multiplied by the rated voltage of the system. The full-scale deflection
value is then subdivided into a value range shown in the table below.
For the total apparent power and the total active power (position f), the calculated value still
has to be multiplied by 3 before the full-scale deflection value can be read from the table.
The table below gives the value ranges for power [W/VA]:
Table 3- 21 Value ranges for power [W/VA] on the analog output module
From To Full-scale deflection value
0 49,999 50,000
50,000 99,999 100,000
100,000 199,999 200,000
200,000 299,999 300,000
300,000 399,999 400,000
400,000 499,999 500,000
500,000 999,999 1,000,000
1,000,000 1,999,999 2,000,000
2,000,000 2,999,999 3,000,000
3,000,000 4,999,999 5,000,000
5,000,000 9,999,999 10,000,000
10,000,000 19,999,999 20,000,000
20,000,000 ∞ 30,000,000
Example:
IR = 1600 A, rated voltage = 400 V; ⇒ Full-scale deflection value = 1,000,000 W
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
78 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Switch position "f"
If the rotary coding switch is at the "f" position, the most important measured values are
output, with the exception of the currents. In conjunction with another module in the position
"I", all important measured values are thus displayed:
A01: Frequency of the system
A02: Mean value of the phase-to-phase voltage
A03: Total active power
A04: Mean value of the power factors
The scale for the display of the frequency must reach from 45 Hz to 65 Hz. This makes it
possible to display the standard frequencies in the IEC and UL countries. Example: 45 Hz
correspond to 0 V/4 mA and 65 Hz correspond to 10 V/20 mA. The scalings of the other
measured values can be read in the appropriate switch positions.
Switch position "cos φ"
The measured values below are output in the switch position "cos φ":
A01: Power factor cos φL1
A02: Power factor cos φL2
A03: Power factor cos φL3
A04: Phase unbalance current in %
The display of the power factors ranges from 0.7 capacitive (corresponding to 0 V/4 mA)
through 1 (corresponding to 5 V/12 mA) to 0.7 inductive (corresponding to 10 V/20 mA). The
phase unbalance of the three currents is output from 0% (0 V/4 mA) to 50% (10 V/20 mA).
Note the correct polarity when connecting.
SENTRON WL
3.5 External CubicleBUS modules
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 79
3.5.5.2 Test function
Test mode is activated by pressing the "TEST" button. Test mode is indicated by the yellow
DEVICE LED. During test mode, the measured values continue to be updated but are not
output on the relevant channel.
Test mode is carried out as follows:
● Pressing the "TEST" button switches to test mode.
● When the "TEST" button is next pressed, output 1 is selected. This is indicated by
LED A01. The test output signal is output. With currents, voltages and power, this
corresponds to the full-scale value, in the case of cos φ1 and frequency 55 Hz.
● When the button is next pressed, output 2 is selected. This is indicated by LED A02. This
automatically deletes the value at output 1 and sets the value at output 2.
● By repeating the previous step, all four outputs can be gradually tested with regard to
their wiring and correct scaling.
● If output A04 is selected and the "TEST" button is pressed, all four LEDs are activated but
no output is set. When the button is next pressed, output 1 is selected again.
● If the "TEST" button is not pressed for 30 seconds after selecting an output, test mode is
automatically canceled and normal operating mode is activated. The currently pending
values in the background are now available again at the outputs.
3.5.5.3 Technical data
The table below shows the technical data of the analog output module on the CubicleBUS:
Table 3- 22 Technical data of the analog configurable output module
Operating voltage on the CubicleBUS min./max. (V) 19.2 / 28.8
Current consumption from the CubicleBUS min./max. (mA) 63 1 50
Inner flow resistance of the rotary coil instrument voltage min./max. 20 kΩ/∞
Inner flow resistance of the rotary coil instrument current min./max. 20/250 Ω
Maximum number of modules on one Cubicle 2
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.74 / 5.4
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70 / 86 / 95
Weight (kg) 0.223 / 0.321
Temperature range (°C) – 20 / 60
SENTRON WL
3.6 Measuring accuracy
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
80 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.6 Measuring accuracy
3.6.1 3WL breaker measuring accuracy
The measuring accuracy depends on the circuit breaker components.
The accuracy (when ordering the switch + trip unit + metering function PLUS direct) refers to
the full-scale value.
The full-scale value refers to the maximum rated current In max of the breaker, regardless of
the size of the rating plug and the rated current In set by it.
Example:
If a rating plug 630 A is used with a 1000 A switch, the accuracy for the full-scale value is
1000 A.
ETU45B / ETU745, ETU748
Display With communication
Without metering function PLUS ± 10 % ± 10 %
With metering function PLUS ± 10 % ± 1 %1
ETU76B / ETU776
Display With communication
Without metering function PLUS ± 10 % ± 10 %
With metering function PLUS ± 1 %1 ± 1 %1
1 If a metering function PLUS is retrofitted, an accuracy of ± 3% is available, and this in turn is
oriented around the full-scale value.
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS
3.7.1 Power required by a SENTRON WL with CubicleBUS
The SENTRON WL circuit breakers with CubicleBUS must also communicate and indicate
internally and externally, even when the main contacts are open. For this reason, it is
necessary here to connect an external power supply. The required power differs here
according to the degree of configuration and options used.
SENTRON WL
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 81
General information
The transformers for the SENTRON WL circuit breakers consist of two parts:
● Rogowski coils: supply the current values
● Energy transformers: supply the trip unit with energy
In the case of breakers without additional external supply, the trip units are already activated
with 80 A 3-phase or higher for size 1 and 2, and with 150 A 3-phase or higher for size 3,
and they monitor the power distribution.
Energy requirements
On the ETU45B / ETU745, ETU748 trip unit, the energy from the transformers is sufficient to
activate not only the protection functions but also the four-line display. Auxiliary power is only
required for the backlighting. If the CubicleBUS is connected with 24 V DC, the display of the
ETU45B / ETU745, ETU748 draws its power from this voltage.
The pixel-graphics display of the ETU76B / ETU776 requires more power than the energy
transformer can supply. For this reason, the display of the ETU76B / ETU776 only functions
when an external CubicleBUS power supply is connected. This does not affect the protection
functions!
NOTICE
Number of CubicleBUS components
If more CubicleBUS components than just the trip unit are used in a SENTRON WL circuit
breaker, this breaker must be supplied with an external 24 V DC auxiliary voltage.
CubicleBUS connection
The CubicleBUS comprises four cores, two for communication and two for the 24 V
DC power supply.
Connect the CubicleBUS as follows to the external terminals X8:1 to X8:4:
● 24 V DC to X8:3
● Ground of 24 V DC to X8:4
SENTRON WL
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
82 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3.7.2 Selecting the power supply
Note the following when selecting the power supply:
● First, you must use the available CubicleBUS modules to calculate the maximum
continuous current drawn by the CubicleBUS modules from the CubicleBUS supply.
● The second variable to be calculated is the peak inrush current of all modules. The power
supply must be able to carry the maximum peak inrush current for a period of 100 ms.
The table below contains the details of continuous current drawn and the maximum start-up
current for selecting the suitable power supply for a SENTRON WL circuit breaker with
CubicleBUS.
Table 3- 23 Calculating the power consumption of the CubicleBUS modules for SENTRON WL with
CubicleBUS system
CubicleBUS module Number of
modules per
CubicleBUS
Max. continuous
current per module
from the
CubicleBUS
Max. start-up
current per module
from the
CubicleBUS
ETU745 trip unit 1 120 mA 2000 mA
ETU776 trip unit 1 170 mA 2000 mA
Metering function PLUS 1 120 mA 120 mA
Breaker Status Sensor BSS 1 40 mA 110 mA
COM16 communication module 1 125 mA 180 mA
ZSI module 1 50 mA 125 mA
Digital output module with rotary coding
switch, relay outputs
1-2 180 mA 125 mA
Digital output module, configurable, relay
outputs
1 180 mA 125 mA
Analog output module 1-2 110 mA 800 mA
Digital input module 1-2 30 mA 125 mA
BDA PLUS 1 250 mA 350 mA
Connection of several SENTRON WLs
To connect several SENTRON WL circuit breakers to a power supply, the aggregates of the
continuous currents and start-up currents must be taken into account.
SITOP Power power supply
The appropriate power supplies can be selected from the Siemens SITOP Power range.
SENTRON WL
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 83
Example:
A switch consists of an ETU745, BSS, COM16, metering function, and output module with
relay contacts.
The maximum continuous current is 585 mA, and the maximum start-up current is 2635 mA.
That is, a SITOP Power 2 is sufficient for power supply. For one or more SENTRON WLs, a
power supply from the SITOP range can be selected. You can find further technical data in
the Catalog KT 10.1 or in the online Mall (https://mall.automation.siemens.com).
The table below provides the values for selecting the power supply with SITOP:
Table 3- 24 Power supply from the SITOP range for SENTRON WL with CubicleBUS
Max. continuous
current
Max. start-up current Type Order number
0 to 2 A Up to 7 A up to 300 ms SITOP Power 2 6EP1332-2BA10
2 to 5 A Up to 20 A up to 350
ms
SITOP Power 5 6EP1333-2BA01
5 to 10 A Up to 38 A up to 200
ms
SITOP Power 10 6EP1334-2BA01
SENTRON WL
3.7 External current consumption with CubicleBUS
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
84 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 85
SENTRON VL 4
4.1 Brief description
4.1.1 Brief description of SENTRON VL
Thanks to their compact design, the SENTRON VL160 to VL1600 and SENTRON VL150 UL
to 1600 UL circuit breakers meet the high requirements of today's electrical distribution
systems. They are available both with thermo-magnetic overcurrent trip units (16 A to
630 A), and with solid-state overcurrent trip units (63 A to 1600 A). Depending on the desired
level of diversity of the data, the SENTRON VL can be connected via the COM21 module,
depending on the ETU used.
General information
The basic circuit breaker is designed for fixed mounting and can be easily changed to a plug-
in version or a withdrawable version using the appropriate kit. The available 3-pole and 4-
pole SENTRON VL circuit breakers are especially suitable for applications in the area of
plant, motor or generator protection, in starter combinations or as non-automatic air circuit
breakers.
Note
Validity of the values
The values specified in this chapter apply only for the ETUs with the order numbers 3VLxxx-
xMxxx, 3VLxxx-xNxxx, 3VLxxx-xUxx, or 3VLxxx-xJxx. For other order numbers, the values
given may vary slightly.
Connection
Depending on the ETU used, the SENTRON VL can be connected via the Modbus RTU
module COM21. It is also possible to run communication at a higher level
(Ethernet/intranet/Internet) using the BDA PLUS (Breaker Data Adapter PLUS).
Accessories
Interlocking and locking options ensure increased safety in critical processes. The
accessories, from the auxiliary trip unit and motorized operating mechanisms to the
communication system, are simple and easy to retrofit.
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
86 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
System architecture
The system architecture of the SENTRON VL enables communication via Modbus RTU. A
shared profile together with the SENTRON WL enables use of shared programs both in a
PLC and on a PC.
MODBUS
① PLC, e.g. SIMATIC S7
② Customer-specific software
③ COM21 (not with LCD ETU)
④ COM21 from Release 2
⑤ SENTRON VL with ETU
Figure 4-1 System architecture of the SENTRON VL
4.1.2 Overview of the accessories
There is a host of accessories available for the SENTRON VL circuit breakers. There are:
● External accessories, e.g. overcurrent release, Modbus RTU module, COM21, and front
rotary operating mechanism. External accessories are mounted outside the
SENTRON VL.
● Internal accessories, e.g. alarm switches, shunt releases. Internal accessories are
mounted inside the SENTRON VL under the front plate in "compartments". This means
no additional space is required. The compartments are located to the left and right of the
toggle handle. It must be noted here that certain internal accessories must only be
mounted in certain compartments (see the paragraph "Installing components in the
accessory compartments")!
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 87
The figure below shows an overview of the accessories of the SENTRON VL:
① Withdrawable/plug-in socket ⑫Front rotary operating mechanism
② Withdrawable side panels ⑬Door-coupling rotary operating mechanism
③ Phase barriers ⑭SENTRON 3VL circuit breaker
④ Flared busbars ⑮Internal accessories
⑤ Straight connection bars ⑯Solid-state overcurrent trip unit LCD ETU
⑥ Multiple feed-in terminal for Al/Cu ⑰Solid-state overcurrent trip unit with
communication function
⑦ Box terminal for Cu ⑱Thermal/magnetic overcurrent release
⑧ Extended terminal cover ⑲RCD module
⑨ Standard terminal cover ⑳Rear terminals – flat and round
⑩ Masking/cover frame for door cut-out COM21 communication module for Modbus RTU
⑪ Stored-energy motorized operating
mechanism Battery power supply with test function for
electronic trip unit
Figure 4-2 SENTRON VL, accessories
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
88 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
4.1.3 Properties of the trip units
Every trip unit of the SENTRON VL can in principle be enabled for communication with the
appropriate accessories. However, they vary in their equipment (such as the display) and in
the available options for setting the protection parameters (rotary coding switch, keyboard,
software).
4.1.4 Electronic overcurrent tripping systems
The electronic overcurrent tripping systems ETU and LCD ETU are suitable for rated
currents in the range from 63 A to 1600 A.
The difference between the two ETUs is that on the ETU without LCD, the settings for
tripping current, delay time, etc. must be made using the rotary coding switch.
By contrast, on the SENTRON VL with LCD ETU, the settings can be made conveniently
using a menu-prompted display that also shows current values during operation such as
those for the current of individual phases.
ETU
On the electronic trip units with rotary coding switch (ETU), the COM21 is required for
connecting to Modbus RTU.
LCD ETU
On the electronic trip units with display (LCD ETU), connection is possible via the
Modbus RTU module COM21 from Release 2.
4.1.5 Protection functions
The table below shows the protection functions of the different trip units and their setting
ranges.
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 89
Overcurrent releases VL160 to VL1600 - Function overview
6HWWLQJRSWLRQV
/
2YHUORDG
SURWHFWLRQ
6
6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQVKRUW
WLPHGHOD\HG
,
6KRUWFLUFXLW
SURWHFWLRQLQVWDQ
WDQHRXV
*
*URXQGIDXOWSURWHFWLRQ
,U
,Q,VG
,U
W
VG
>V@
,L
,Q,J
,Q
W
J
>V@
'. 0 ,
'( 0 ,
(( 0 ,
'$ 70
/,
'' 70
/,
'& 70
/,
(+ 70
/,
(- 70
/,
($ 70
/,1
(& 70
/,1
(0 70
/,1
63 (780
/,
03 (780
/,
6% (78 /,
0% (78 /,
/% (78 /,
7$ (78 /,1
1$ (78 /,1
/$ (78 /,1
7% (78 /,
1% (78 /,
6/ (78 /,* 2))
0/ (78 /,* 2))
6) (78 /,* 2))
0) (78 /,* 2))
71 (78 /,1* 2))
11 (78 /,1* 2))
6( (78 /6,
0( (78 /6,
/( (78 /6,
7( (78 /6,
1( (78 /6,
7) (78 /6,1
1) (78 /6,1
/) (78 /6,1
6* (78 /6,* 2))
0* (78 /6,* 2))
6+ (78 /6,* 2))
0+ (78 /6,* 2))
7+ (78 /6,1* 2))
1+ (78 /6,1* 2))
66 (780
/,
06 (780
/,
/6 (780
/,
83 /&'(780 /,
8+ /&'(78 /,/6/6,
8- /&'(78 /,/6,/,1
/6,1
8/ /&'(78 /6,*
80 /&'(78 /6,*
81 /&'(78 /6,*/6,1*
2UGHU1R
VXSSOHPHQW
5HOHDVHV
6\VWHPSURWHFWLRQ
0RWRUSURWHFWLRQ
6WDUWHUSURWHFWLRQ
1RQDXWRPDWLF
FLUFXLWEUHDNHUV
)XQFWLRQ
6WDUWHUJHQHUDWRU
SURWHFWLRQ
1) Size-dependent
2) TM up to In = 630 A
3) Motor protection up to In = 500 A
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
90 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
General data
'. 0
'( 0
(( 0
'$ 70
'' 70
'& 70
(+ 70
(- 70
($ 70
(& 70
(0 70
63 (780
,
5
03 (780
,
5
6% (78
0% (78
/% (78
7$ (78
1$ (78
/$ (78
7% (78
1% (78
6/ (78
¿
0/ (78
¿
6) (78
À
0) (78
À
71 (78
À
11 (78
À
6( (78
0( (78
/( (78
7( (78
1( (78
7) (78
1) (78
/) (78
6* (78
¿
0* (78
¿
6+ (78
À
0+ (78
À
7+ (78
À
1+ (78
À
66 (780
,
5
06 (780
,
5
/6 (780
,
5
83 /&'(780
,
5
8+ /&'(78
8- /&'(78 2))
8/ /&'(78
¿
80 /&'(78
¿
Á
81 /&'(78
À
2))
2UGHU1R
VXSSOHPHQW
5HOHDVHV
7KHUPDOLPDJH
3KDVHIDLOXUH
&RPPXQLFDWLRQFDSDEOH
*URXQGIDXOWSURWHFWLRQ
1XPEHURISROHV
1SROHSURWHFWHG
,
W212))
7ULSFODVVW&
7LPHODJFODVVW5
7KHUPDOPDJQHWLFUHOHDVHV
0DJQHWLF
UHOHDVHV
(OHFWURQLFUHOHDVH
/&'GLVSOD\
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 91
1) Size-dependent Ground-fault protection
2) TM up to In = 630 A ① Vectorial summation current formation (3-conductor system)
3) Motor protection up to In = 500 A ② Vectorial summation current formation (4-conductor system)
4) With COM20/COM21 ③ Direct recording of the ground-fault current in the neutral point
of the transformer
4.1.6 Data transfer by means of Modbus RTU
Data of the SENTRON VL circuit breaker can be transferred via Modbus RTU via the
COM21 (depending on the ETU).
Connection via the COM21 module
The COM21 module is connected to the ETU of the SENTRON VL. All the available data
(see table below) is read from the trip unit and made available on the bus via this connection.
This option provides a direct communication link between the SENTRON VL and
Modbus RTU. The SENTRON VL circuit breaker must be equipped with a communication-
enabled ETU for connection to the COM21.
SENTRON VL
4.1 Brief description
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
92 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Table 4- 1 Connection of the SENTRON VL trip units
Transferrable data LCD ETU +
COM21 from
R2
ETU +
COM21
Switching on or off (in conjunction with a motorized operating
mechanism)
✓ ✓
Delete trip memory ✓ ✓
Delete max. measured values ✓ ✓
Delete maintenance information ✓ ✓
ON or OFF status ✓ ✓
Tripped signals ✓ ✓
Tripped signals with cause of tripping operation, tripping current and
time stamp
✓ ✓
Alarm (e.g. overload) ✓ ✓
Alarms with time stamp
(e.g. overload, phase unbalance current, etc.)
✓
Threshold violation with time stamp (e.g. phase currents)
Max. phase current of a phase ✓ ✓
Phase currents with max. value and time stamp ✓ ✓
Neutral conductor current with min./max. value and time stamp ✓ max. only*
Read/write to LCD ETU ✓
Read ETU ✓
Number and type of tripping operations: L, S, G ✓ ✓
Operating hours ✓ ✓
Type of trip unit: LSIG ✓ ✓
3/4-pole switch ✓ ✓
Current sensor rating ✓ ✓
Serial no. of the trip unit ✓ ✓
Software version of the trip unit ✓ ✓
Time synchronization ✓ ✓
ZSI functionality ✓ ✓
* without time stamp
See also
powerconfig (Page 147)
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 93
4.2 COM21 connection
4.2.1 Data exchange with the COM21
A1(+) 24 V A2(-) A B X SPE/PE
(+) ZSI IN (-) (+) TIE BR (-) (+) ZSI OUT (-)
(ON) SEO (OFF) L1+ XWE 24V
DEVICE
MODBUS
TRIP UNIT
TEST/
RESET
MODBUS
COM21
Figure 4-3 MODBUS COM21
Data exchange can be customized by the customer. For details of the available functions
see Modbus RTU data transfer (Page 123) and Data library (Page 157)
Interlocking and securing
If security considerations demand it, it is possible to lock control/write access to the circuit
breaker via hardware and software using a hardware wire jumper (WE terminal).
For the purpose, for example, of preventing switching via MODBUS (manual/automatic mode
with connected motorized operating mechanism) or modification of parameters.
Time stamp
All important events are provided with a time stamp (time stamp for tripping operations, time
stamp for maximum values) by the integral clock to enable tracing of the precise course of a
fault, for example. The clock can be synchronized with the clock of the automation system by
means of a simple mechanism.
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
94 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
4.2.2 Setting the MODBUS address of the COM21
When configuring the COM21 for data exchange, you must note that the COM21 is supplied
as standard with the MODBUS address 126. This must then be changed by the user when
configuring the system.
The address can be set or changed via the
powerconfig
software or the "addressing plug"
(3UF7910-0AA00-0). The address is set at the addressing plug and the addressing plug is
connected with the COM21 (above the Modbus interface). The TEST / RESET button on the
COM21 must be pressed for approximately 3 seconds. As soon as the address has been
transferred, the LED DEVICE flashes and the addressing plug can be removed again.
Example
MODBUS address: 58
1 OFF
2 ON
4 OFF
8 ON
16 ON
32 ON
64 OFF
2 + 8 + 16 + 32 = 58
Note
Addressing plug
The addressing plug (3UF7910-0AA00-0) must be ordered once.
Figure 4-4 Addressing plug
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 95
4.2.3 COM21 pin assignment
The COM21 must be supplied with 24 V DC for operations and this must be applied to the
terminals A2 (ground) and A1 (+). This voltage is looped-through via the communication
cable to the ETU (trip unit) of the 3VL switch such that this is also operated when the main
contacts are open. Without this supply the ETU would not be able to communicate
diagnostics information, such as the reason for the last tripping operation if there is no
internal supply.
The auxiliary switch and alarm switch are wired direct to the ETU and then activated in the
LCD menu of the ETU. This makes the status available via the communication system by
means of COM21.
The figure below shows the principle of the connection between the COM21 and a
SENTRON VL including the LEDs and the write protection WriteEnable.
$ODUPVZLWFK
$X[LOLDU\VZLWFK
$
1
1
4
+6
))
'
'
&
&
8
$6
/
./
.
/
.
/
.
7
7
7
7
)
,
6
/
Figure 4-5 COM21 connection to SENTRON VL
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
96 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
4.2.4 Write protection with COM21
In real applications in power distribution, it is necessary to disable write access via
Modbus RTU temporarily or permanently, during maintenance work, for example.
You must ensure remote access is possible for setting the address and the trip unit values.
For this, the inputs WE and 24 V DC (WriteEnable) on the COM21 must be jumpered or
closed via a switch.
If this is not the case, no settings can be written to the COM21 and the LCD ETU. In
addition, operation of the motorized operating mechanism via Modbus RTU is not possible.
4.2.5 Communication connection to the ETU
The next page contains a description of how to establish the communication link between the
COM21 and the SENTRON VL with ETU.
The ON/OFF position (auxiliary switch), and the triggered signal (alarm switch) of the switch
are signaled via the wiring of the ETU. In the case of ETUs with communication capability
the auxiliary and alarm switches are factory installed and assigned to the accessory
compartment (X2). You can find details in the operating instructions for the communication-
capable, solid-state overcurrent trip unit (ETUs).
Different communication cables must be used depending on which SENTRON VL circuit
breaker is used. A 1.5 m connecting cable is included with the communication-capable ETU.
These cables are listed with their different lengths and switch assignments in the table
below. They can be ordered as accessories.
Table 4- 2 Communication cables available for order
3VL9000-8AQ60 3VL4 - 1.5 m JG - 59.05 in.
3VL9000-8AQ61 3VL4 - 3 m JG - 118.1 in.
3VL9000-8AQ70 3VL5 / 3VL6 / 3VL7 / 3VL8 - 1.5 m LG / MG / NG / PG - 59.05 in.
3VL9000-8AQ71 3VL5 / 3VL6 / 3VL7 / 3VL8 - 3 m LG / MG / NG / PG - 118.1 in.
3VL9000-8AQ80 3VL2 / 3VL3 - 1.5 m DG / FG - 59.05 in.
3VL9000-8AQ81 3VL2 / 3VL3 - 3 m DG / FG - 118.1 in.
An extension of the cables beyond the specified dimensions is not permissible!
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 97
4.2.6 Connecting the optional motorized operating mechanism to COM21
If the circuit breaker is to be switched on or off via the bus, the electric motorized operating
mechanism with spring energy store is needed.
Note
The contact between WE and 24 V must be closed for the remote function! Without this wire
jumper, the SENTRON VL cannot be switched on or off via Modbus RTU.
More information on fitting the motorized operating mechanism can be found in the
installation instructions for the motorized operating mechanism.
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
98 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
(+)
(-)
XWE24V
L1+ L1- PE
L1+ L1- PE
L1+
ON
OFF
SEO / MO
MO
MO
L1+
ON
OFF
SEO / MO
X10.1 X10.2 X10.9
X20.4 X20.1 X20.5
X20.2
X20.3
X10.4
X10.5
X10.3
Device
MODBUS
Trip Unit
MODBUS
ZSI OUT
ZSI IN
TIE BRK
A1(+) A2(-)
DC 24 V
SPE / PE A B
3VL9_00-3M_00
3VL9_00-3M_10
XWE24V
Device
MODBUS
Trip Unit
MODBUS
ZSI OUT
ZSI IN
TIE BRK
A1(+) A2(-)
DC 24 V
SPE / PE A B
*)
*)
Figure 4-6 Connection diagram of the COM21 to the motorized operating mechanism, SENTRON
VL
Table 4- 3 Connection of the motorized operating mechanism, SENTRON VL 3VL9_00-3M_00
Power supply
Motor COM21
DC AC
L1– X20.1 GND N
S2A X20.2 SEO (ON)
S2B X20.3 SEO (OFF)
L1+ X20.4 L1+ L+ L
PE X20.5 PE PE
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 99
Table 4- 4 Connection of the motorized operating mechanism, SENTRON VL 3VL9_00-3M_10
Power supply
Motor COM21
DC AC
L1 (L+) X10.1 L1+ L+ L
N (L-) X10.2 GND N
L1 (L+) X10.3 L1+ L+ L
S1 "ON" X10.4 SEO (ON)
S2 "OFF" X10.5 SEO (OFF)
PE X10.9 PE PE
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
100 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Table 4- 5 Technical data of the COM21 module
In operation -25 °C...+70 °C, no condensation Permissible ambient
temperature During storage and transportation -40 °C...+80 °C
< 2000 m Installation altitude above sea
level Permissible max. ambient temperature +50 °C (no
safe isolation)
< 3000 m
Weight approx. 0.28 kg
Degree of protection according
to IEC 60529
IP20
Shock resistance (sine pulse) 100 m/s2 20 ms
220 m/s2 11 ms
Mounting position Arbitrary
Conducted interference; burst according to IEC
61000-4-4
2 kV (power ports)
2 kV (signal ports)
Conducted interference; high-frequency according
to IEC 61000-4-6
10 V
Conducted interference; surge according to IEC
61000-4-5
1 kV (line to ground)
Electrostatic discharge; ESD according to IEC
61000-4-2
8 kV (air discharge)
4 kV (contact discharge)
Immunity to electromagnetic
interference according to IEC
60947-1
Field-based interference suppression; radiated
immunity according to IEC 61000-4-3
10 V/m
Immunity to electromagnetic
interference according to IEC
60947-1
Conducted and radiated interference emission DIN EN 55011, A
/DIN EN 55022, A
Safe isolation according to IEC
60947-1
All circuits are safely isolated from the control circuit for the motor operator in accordance
with IEC 60947-1 (terminal SEO (ON), SEO (OFF), L1+), that is, dimensioned with double
creepages and clearances
Fixing Snap-mounted to 35 mm DIN rail or screw fixing via additional push-in lugs
Green/red/yellow "Device" LED • Green: Ready
• Red: Function test negative,
device disabled
• Yellow: Memory submodule or
addressing plug detected
• Off: No control supply voltage
Green "MODBUS" LED • Continuous light: -
Communication with Modbus
and delay time - automatic baud
rate search successfully
completed
• Flashing: - Automatic baud rate
search active
• Off: - No communication with
Modbus and delay time elapsed
Indicator
Green "Trip Unit" LED • Flashing: ZSI input detected
• Off: No communication with ETU
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 101
Setting of the communication
address of the side box
ZSI function test
TEST / RESET key
Reset of the side box back to the
start sequence
Front 10-pin system interface for
connecting the addressing plug
System interface
Bottom RJ45 socket for communication link
to ETU
MODBUS interface Connection of the MODBUS cables
via terminal connection A, B or 9-pin
SUB-D socket
Operating voltage US in accordance with DIN EN 61131-2
0.85 ... 1.2 x US
24 V DC
Power consumption 1.2 W
Current consumption US = 24 V DC Max. 50 mA
Rated insulating voltage UI 300 V
(pollution degree 3)
Rated peak withstand voltage UImp 4 kV
Number 2 monostable relay outputs; isolated
NO contacts
ON duration 300 ms, fixed setting
Rated short-circuit capacity 2 A
Relay outputs for controlling a
motorized operating
mechanism (3VL9x00-3Mx00)
for VL160x and VL160-VL1600
Specified short-circuit protection See operating instructions of the
motorized operating mechanism
used.
Output ZSI OUT - Output for Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI); max. 8 circuit breakers
1 input with its own supply (24 V DC) from the device electronics for the WE function
(write protection for PROFIBUS DP/Modbus RTU)
H signal UIn: 15...30 V; IIn: Typically 5 mA for
24 V
L signal UIn: 0...5 V; IIn: Typically 0.75 mA for
5 V
Inputs (binary)
ZSI IN - Input for Zone Selective Interlocking (ZSI);
max. 20 circuit breakers
Tightening torque 0.8...1.2 Nm
Solid 1 x 0.5...4 mm2; 2 x 0.5...2.5 mm2
Finely stranded with end sleeve 1 x 0.5...2.5 mm2; 2 x 0.5...1.5 mm2
AWG cable (solid) 1 x AWG 20 to 12;
2 x AWG 20 to 14
Conductor cross-sections
AWG cable (finely stranded) 1 x AWG 20 to 14;
2 x AWG 20 to 16
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
102 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Note
Transmission line
It is recommended to transfer the ZSI signal via a twisted-pair signal line with a cross-section
of at least 0.75 mm2. The maximum length must not exceed 400 m. Recommended cable
type: Shielded MSR cable LSYCY (2 x 0.75 mm2); made by: Siemens
Note
The motorized operating mechanism via Modbus RTU must be in automatic mode for
switching!
4.2.7 LED display on the COM21
To monitor whether the COM21 is ready for operation and data exchange is taking place,
three LEDs designated TRIP UNIT, MODBUS und DEVICE are located on the front cover of
the COM21. The operating statuses explained in the tables below can be read from these
LEDs.
DEVICE LED
The DEVICE LED provides information on the status of the COM21.
Table 4- 6 DEVICE LED
DEVICE LED Meaning
Off No voltage on the COM21
Green steady light COM21 is supplied, there is no fault, no addressing plug is
connected
Steady yellow light The addressing plug is connected; the address setting has not
yet been read or stored in non-volatile memory.
Flashing yellow The addressing plug is connected; the address setting has
been read and stored in non-volatile memory.
Flashing red The addressing plug is connected and has a fault.
Red rapid flashing COM21 has a serious internal fault
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 103
MODBUS LED
The MODBUS LED shows the status of the Modbus RTU communication of the COM21
module.
Table 4- 7 MODBUS LED
MODBUS LED Meaning
Off No voltage on the COM21
No Modbus RTU communication: No communication to the
COM21 active or delay time for new communication elapsed
Green Existing Modbus RTU communication:
Valid MODBUS message frame detected and wait time for
new communication not elapsed.
LED TRIP UNIT (ETU)
The TRIP UNIT LED provides information on the status of the trip unit
Table 4- 8 LED TRIP UNIT (ETU)
ETU LED Meaning
Off No voltage on COM21; no communication or communication
fault between the 3VL ETU and the COM21
Static green (steady light) COM21 is supplied externally with 24 V DC; communication
with 3VL ETU in order
Flashing green The ZSI signal is active on the connected ETU (used as
indicator for the ZSI test)
SENTRON VL
4.2 COM21 connection
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
104 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 105
Zone Selective Interlocking 5
5.1 ZSI
With circuit breakers on several grading levels, the aim is to assign these selectively to each
other so that in the event of an overcurrent only the circuit breaker immediately upstream
switches off the overcurrent.
5.1.1 Selectivity
A plant with several protective devices switched in series is selective only if the protective
device immediately in front of the fault location picks up in the event of an overcurrent and
switches off the overcurrent alone. Branches not affected continue to be supplied.
5.1.2 Time selectivity
One method of achieving this aim in the short-circuit or ground fault is time selectivity of the
circuit breakers.
WVG PV
WVG PV
WVG PV
WVG PV
Figure 5-1 Example of time selectivity
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.1 ZSI
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
106 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
This means each level of the circuit breaker receives another time delay (tsd) that rises in the
direction of the incoming supply. Tripping of the circuit breakers that are further removed
from the short-circuit is thus delayed and the circuit breaker closest to the short-circuit is
given time to switch the short-circuit off.
The disadvantage of such a system, however, is that one short-circuit trip is always delayed
and that there is a long delay in switching off a short-circuit close to the infeed, and the plant
is thus loaded with the short-circuit current for longer than necessary. This can require
increased dimensioning of the system.
5.1.3 ZSI function
The ZSI function (ZSI = Zone Selective Interlocking) offers full selectivity with an extremely
short delay time (tZSI) regardless of the number of grading levels and the location of the fault
in the distribution system in the short-time-delayed S range and G range of the trip
characteristic.
S range = short-time-delayed short-circuit
protection
=> tZSI = 50 ms
G range = ground fault protection => tZSI = 100 ms
The benefit of ZSI is all the greater the higher the number of grading levels in large and
meshed networks, and the longer the resulting delay times for standard time grading.
By shortening the break time, the ZSI function significantly reduces stress in the switchgear
in the event of a short-circuit and/or ground fault.
Note
The ZSI function is only effective in the case of short-time-delayed short-circuit protection S
up to the level of the preset maximum short-time-delayed short-circuit protection. If the short-
circuit current exceeds this permissible maximum value, the short-circuit current is so great
that instantaneous tripping of the circuit breaker always takes place in order to protect the
system.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.1 ZSI
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 107
5.1.4 Operating principle
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,,1
=6,,1
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,,1
=6,,1
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
● Every circuit breaker is equipped with a ZSI module
● The ZSI modules are linked to each other via twisted-pair connections
● The ZSI output (ZSI OUT) ① is connected with the ZSI input (ZSI IN) ②
● ZSI modules in one grading level are switched in parallel (see examples)
● Coupling switches can be integrated (see examples)
● Medium voltage can be integrated (see examples)
● Extremely simple parameterization of the ZSI modules
5.1.5 Course over time
5.1.5.1 Condition ZSI = ON and presence of a short-circuit (S)
1. The overcurrent releases detect a short-circuit (S) and start the predefined delay times tsd
2. Each circuit breaker that detects the short-circuit informs the higher-level breakers of the
detected short-circuit (ZSI_OUT ⇒ ZSI_IN ⇒ ZSI_OUT ...)
3. Each circuit breaker that receives no information (ZSI IN) from subordinate grading levels
and detects the short-circuit forces a short-circuit trip after 50 ms (tZSI).
4. Otherwise, a short-circuit trip occurs at the end of the delay time tsd
Result:The ZSI module switches off the short-circuit after 50 ms in the next level to the fault.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.1 ZSI
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
108 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
5.1.5.2 Condition ZSI = ON and presence of a ground fault (G)
1. The overcurrent releases detect the ground fault and start the predefined delay times tg =
ground fault (G)
2. Each circuit breaker that detects the ground fault informs the higher-level breakers of the
detected ground fault (ZSI_OUT ⇒ ZSI_IN ⇒ ZSI_OUT ...)
3. Each circuit breaker that receives no information (ZSI IN) from subordinate grading levels
and detects the ground fault forces a short-circuit trip after 100 ms (tZSI).
4. Otherwise a trip occurs at the end of the delay time tg (100 - 500 ms)
Result: The ZSI module switches off the ground fault after 100 ms in the next level to the
fault.
Overview of the times:
tZSI = Guaranteed non-tripping time: 50 ms short-circuit/100 ms ground fault
tsd = From 80 – 4000 ms depending on the tripping unit ETU
tg = 100 – 500 ms
Plus the typical mechanical tripping time depending on the circuit breaker 20 – 40 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 109
5.2 Examples
5.2.1 Function example
E
D
*UDGLQJOHYHO *UDGLQJOHYHO *UDGLQJOHYHO
WJ PV
WVG PV
:/
6(17521
4
4
6(17521
:/
WVG PV
WJ PV
4
6(17521
:/
WVG PV
WJ PV
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,287
=6,287
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,287
=6,287
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,287
=6,287
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
Example from the perspective of the circuit breaker (Q2). The operational principle of the ZSI
is explained using the following graphic.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
110 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
5.2.2 Tabular representation
5.2.2.1 Short-circuit
Tabular representation from the perspective of the circuit breaker Q2:
Table 5- 1 Short-circuit
ZSI
ON / OFF
S ZSI-IN ZSI-OUT Delay time Time
OFF tsd 300 ms
OFF X X tsd 300 ms
ON X tsd 300 ms
ON X X X tsd 300 ms
ON tZSI 50 ms
ON X X tZSI 50 ms
5.2.2.2 Ground fault
Table 5- 2 Ground fault
ZSI
ON / OFF
GF ZSI-IN ZSI-OUT Delay time Time
OFF tg 400 ms
OFF X X tg 400 ms
ON X tg 400 ms
ON X X X tg 400 ms
ON tZSI 100 ms
ON X X tZSI 100 ms
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 111
5.2.2.3 Example of 3 grading levels without coupling switch
The graphic below shows the functional principle of the ZSI function using an example in the
power distribution system. Both SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL circuit breakers are used
in different grading levels.
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
WVG PV
WVG PV
WVG PV
46(17521:/
46(17521:/
46(17521:/
46(17521:/
Short-circuit in grading level 3
● The switches Q4, Q3 and Q1 detect a short-circuit. Q4 informs Q3 and Q1 via the ZSI
signal so that these do not trip in tZSI = 50 ms.
● Since Q4 in turn does not receive information (ZSI IN) from a subordinate breaker, it is
responsible for switching off the short-circuit as quickly as possible (with delay time tZSI =
50 ms). If this does not happen because, for example, the switch is incapacitated, Q3
operates as a backup and trips after the time-selective setting time of tsd = 200 ms.
● Although Q2 receives the ZSI-IN signal, it is not traversed by the overcurrent.
For this reason, no action is taken with Q2.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
112 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Short-circuit in grading level 2
● Q1 and Q3 determine a short-circuit, Q4 does not. This is why Q3 also does not receive
any ZSI information from Q4, but in turn provides ZSI information for Q1. On the basis of
this information, Q3 knows that it is closest to the short-circuit and trips with a delay of tZSI
= 50 ms instead of tsd = 200 ms.
Time saving = 150 ms.
● Although Q2 receives the ZSI-IN signal, it is not traversed by the overcurrent.
For this reason, no action is taken with Q2.
Short-circuit in grading level 1
Only Q1 determines this short-circuit. It also does not receive information from a subordinate
grading level, and therefore trips after tZSI = 50 ms.
Time saving = 250 ms.
5.2.2.4 Cancelation of the ZSI OUT signal
● ZSI OUT at short-circuit
after removal of the short-circuit current, but after 100 ms at the earliest
● ZSI OUT at ground fault
after removal of the ground fault current, but after 500 ms at the earliest
● MV OUT for medium voltage
after removal of the overcurrent, but after 500 ms at the earliest
● The ZSI OUT signal is canceled at the latest after 3 s
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 113
5.2.2.5 Coupling switch
Wiring example of 3 grading levels with coupling switch
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,PRGXOH
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
The TIE BRKR function (X4-1, 2) ensures that the ZSI IN signal (3, 4) is immediately
forwarded to the output ZSI OUT (5, 6) even if the coupling switch is switched off. Without
the TIE BRKR function, the ZSI signal would not be forwarded.
The coupling switch is a separate grading level and receives its own delay time tsd.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
114 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
=6,0RGXO
6(17521:/
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,PRGXOH
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
5.2.2.6 Wiring example
The example shows ZSI wiring and the set delay times in a mixed system with 3WL and
3VL.
Grading level 2 is a coupling switch. Coupling switches are treated as separate grading
levels and receive their own delay time.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 115
ನ
ನ
ನ
=6,,1
=6,287
=6,287
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
4 4
44
:/
=6,
=6,,1
=6,287
=6,287
7,(%5
7,(%5
=6,,1
44
9/
&20
=6,,1
=6,,1
=6,,1
=6,,1
=6,,1
=6,,1
=6,287
=6,287
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
44
9/
&20
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
4
ನ
ನ
ನ
ನ
44 W
sd
PV
4 W
sd
PV
44 W
sd
PV
44 W
sd
PV
44 W
sd
PV
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.2 Examples
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
116 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
5.2.2.7 Circuit breakers without ZSI function
Circuit breakers without ZSI function can be integrated into a system equipped with ZSI.
However, they must have no delay time since otherwise the selectivity of the circuit breakers
cannot be guaranteed.
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,
&20[
=6,
PRGXOH
=6,,1
=6,287
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
WDG PV
WDG PV
WDG PV
6(17521:/
6(17521:/
6(175219/ 6(175219/
DWDG PV
EWDG PV
Short-circuit at circuit breaker ①
● tsd = 100 ms
Short-circuit at circuit breaker ①. Circuit breaker ① will switch off the short-circuit with a
delay time tsd of 100 ms. The short-circuit is also detected by circuit breaker ② and since
no ZSI-IN signal is detected, switch-off is executed with a delay time tZSI of 50 ms.
tsd > tZSI
100 ms ① > 50 ms ②
⇒ circuit breaker ② trips before circuit breaker ①.
The short-circuit is switched off non-selectively.
● tsd = 0 ms
Short-circuit at circuit breaker ①. Circuit breaker ① will switch off the short-circuit with a
delay time tsd of 0 ms (instantaneous). The short-circuit is also detected by circuit breaker
② and since no ZSI-IN signal is detected, switch-off is executed with a delay time tZSI of
50 ms.
tZSI > tsd
50 ms ② > 0 ms ①
⇒ circuit breaker ① trips before circuit breaker ②.
The short-circuit is switched off selectively.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.3 SENTRON 3WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 117
5.3 SENTRON 3WL
To be able to use the ZSI function on the SENTRON WL circuit breaker, the external
CubicleBUS ZSI module must be used.
Cubicle
%86
Cubicle
%86
7(67
=21(6(/(&7,9(,17(5/2&.,1*=6,
:/$7$$
6(17521:/
'(9,&( * ,1
6287
2))
7(67
6*
*
6
7,(
%5.5 =6,
,1 =6,
287 09
287
ಣಣಣ
5.3.1 Technical data
Operating voltage on the CubicleBUS min./max. (V) 19.2 / 28.8
Current consumption from the CubicleBUS min./max. (mA) 31 / 61
Automatic resetting of the outputs after a maximum of 3 s
Shortest time that blocking signal is pending at the outputs LV 100 ms
Shortest time that blocking signal is pending at the outputs MV 500 ms
Typical tripping time including all delays approx. 80 ms
Maximum number of switches that can be connected to ZSI IN 20
Maximum number of switches that can be connected to ZSI OUT 8
Maximum number of ZSI modules possible on one CubicleBUS 1
Maximum cable length with 2 x 0.75 mm2 400 m
Power loss min./typ./max. (W) 0.8 / 1.76
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 70 / 86 / 95
Weight (kg) 0.223
Temperature range (°C) – 20 / 60
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.3 SENTRON 3WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
118 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
5.3.2 Applications
The function of ZSI can be used for the short-circuit between the phases (S), short-circuit to
ground (G), or both simultaneously (S + G). The ZSI module provides ZSI information for the
medium voltage level via the MV-OUT signal.
If a coupling switch is used in a power distribution system, it can be integrated into the ZSI
concept.
5.3.3 Configuration
The operating mode is set using a rotary coding switch. If this is at the "OFF" position, the
ZSI function is switched off.
5.3.4 Connection
The ZSI module must always be connected to COM1x or X8 as the first external CubicleBUS
module.
Up to 20 circuit breakers can be connected in parallel to ZSI IN, and up to 8 circuit breakers
can be connected in parallel to ZSI OUT.
5.3.5 Test function
The outputs are set in the "TEST" switch position on the rotary coding switch (that is, a
blocking signal is sent to other breakers).
Pressing the "TEST" button switches the ZSI module to test mode. Test mode is indicated by
the yellow DEVICE LED. The inputs and outputs are selected in the same way as on the
digital input/output modules. If the input of the ZSI module is selected, the input can be
activated by pressing and releasing the "TEST" button. If the outputs are selected, they can
be activated by pressing and releasing the "TEST" button.
This makes it possible to check the cables.
The trip times can be checked with the function testing device (3WL9111-0AT44-0AA0).
5.3.6 LED
The activated inputs or outputs are indicated by a yellow LED.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.4 SENTRON 3VL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 119
5.4 SENTRON 3VL
5.4.1 COM20/COM 21
To be able to use the ZSI function on the SENTRON VL circuit breaker, the external
communication module COM20 (PROFIBUS DP) or COM21 (Modbus RTU) and an ETU or
LCD ETU with communication capability must be used.
'(9,&(
352),%86
75,381,7
7(67
5(6(7
352),%86'3
5(/($6(
&20
=6,,1 7,(%5 =6,287
216(22)) / ; :( 9
$$ 63(3( $ % ;
5.4.2 Technical data
Operating voltage min./max. (V) 20,4 / 28,8
Current consumption max. (mA) 50 mA
Automatic resetting of the outputs after a maximum of 3 s
Shortest time that blocking signal is pending at the outputs LV 100 ms
Typical tripping time including all delays approx. 80 ms
Maximum number of switches that can be connected to ZSI IN 20
Maximum number of switches that can be connected to ZSI OUT 8
Maximum cable length with 2 x 0.75 mm2 400 m
Power losses typ. [W] 1,2
Dimensions W/H/D (mm) 45 / 106 / 86
Weight (kg) 0,28
Temperature range (°C) -25 / +70
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.4 SENTRON 3VL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
120 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Note
Cable type recommendation
It is recommended to transfer the ZSI signal via a twisted-pair signal line with a cross-section
of at least 0.75 mm2. The maximum length must not exceed 400 m. (Exception: If the higher-
level breaker is equipped with a COM10, the maximum cable length is limited to 20 m).
Recommended cable type: Shielded MSR cable LSYCY (2 x 0.75 mm2); made by: Siemens
Communication with LCD trip units that have a "U" as the 9th character in the order number
is only possible with COM2x RELEASE 2 or higher.
5.4.3 Applications
The function of ZSI can be used for the short-circuit between the phases (S), short-circuit to
ground (G), or both simultaneously (S + G).
If a coupling switch is used in a power distribution system, it can be integrated into the ZSI
concept.
5.4.4 Configuration
Data point 421 (Table 8-86) and register block 129 are available for controlling the ZSI
functionality with the help of communication.
You can find more information in the Service & Support Portal
(http://www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support).
Alternatively, with LCD trip units that have a "U" as the 9th character in the order number,
the setting can be made via the menu of the trip unit.
The ZSI function, that can be parameterized using a rotary coding switch, is activated at the
factory.
In the case of trip units that have a menu, it is deactivated.
5.4.5 Connection
Up to 20 circuit breakers can be connected in parallel to ZSI IN, and up to 8 circuit breakers
can be connected in parallel to ZSI OUT.
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.4 SENTRON 3VL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 121
5.4.6 LED
If the ZSI function is activated, the Trip Unit LED on COM2x flashes green.
'(9,&(
352),%86
75,381,7
Zone Selective Interlocking
5.4 SENTRON 3VL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
122 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 123
Modbus RTU data transfer 6
6.1 Integration of the circuit breakers into a communication system
There are diverse possibilities for integrating the SENTRON circuit breakers into a
communication system. A shared profile (type and content of the data transfer) for
SENTRON WL and SENTRON VL also enables the use of identical programs at the
automation level and the PC level.
6.2 Modbus RTU
6.2.1 Structure of the job message frame
Structure
Data traffic between the master and the slave and between the slave and the master begins
with the address of the slave. The job message frame consists of the following elements:
1. Address of the MODBUS slave
2. Function code
3. Data of the message frame
4. Checksum of the message frame (CRC)
The structure of the data field depends on the function code used.
Table 6- 1 Structure of the message frame
Address Function code Data CRC
Byte Byte n byte 2 byte
Note
•
A
node address of 0 is called a broadcast message frame and is processed by each node
without a response.
• Address range for circuit breakers limited to 1 to 126 (126 = delivery condition)
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
124 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Cyclic redundancy check (CRC)
The cyclic redundancy check checks the data flow. The CRC consists of 2 bytes:
● one LSB
● one MSB
The transmitting device calculates the CRC and appends it to the message. The receiving
device calculates the CRC again and compares the newly calculated value with the received
CRC. If the two values do not agree, an error has occurred.
For more details see "MODBUS organization" (http://www.modbus.org/)
End of a message frame
If no characters are transferred for the space of 3.5 bytes this is taken as the end of the
message frame. A check is made to determine the validity of the message frame.
See also Function codes (Page 131)
6.2.2 Character frames
The Modbus RTU specification defines the possible character frames.
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 125
Structure of the character frame
Data is exchanged between the circuit breaker and the Modbus RTU master via the serial
interface in an 11-bit character frame.
Depending on the setting of the "PARITY" communication parameter in the circuit breaker,
the 1st stop bit may be replaced by the "parity bit":
6LJQDOVWDWXV
6LJQDOVWDWXV
VWDUWELW
GDWDELWV
SDULW\ELW
VWRSELW
6LJQDOVWDWXV
6LJQDOVWDWXV
VWDUWELW
GDWDELWV
VWRSELWV
GDWDELWVVWDUWELWGDWDELWVSDULW\ELWVWRSELWಯ1ಯ
GDWDELWVVWDUWELWGDWDELWVVWRSELWVಯ1ಯ
Figure 6-1 11-bit character frame
6.2.3 Communication parameter settings
In the delivery condition the circuit breaker has the following parameter settings for
communication purposes:
• Address: 126
• Baud rate: 19200 bps
• Parity: None
Note
All communication modules include an "autobaud search" on startup. This allows the
parameters to adapt to an existing network, so that the switch is able to be communicated
with immediately.
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
126 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Settings
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Low
Description
40963 0xA003 HIGH MODBUS address
40985 0xA019 LOW "MODBUS transmission rate (baud rate)"
40985 0xA019 HIGH Parity
For more information about formats refer to Chapter Formats (Page 243)
6.2.4 Data storage
Name of area Function codes Address range
01 (0x01) - Read output bits
05 (0x05) - Write individual output
Control bytes
15 (0x0F) - Write output block
0 (0x0000) - 15 (0x000F)
Status bytes 02 (0x02) - Read input 0 (0x0000) - 15 (0x000F)
Basic type data 04 (0x04) - Read basic type data 0 (0x0000) - 21 (0x0015)*
03 (0x03) - Read value buffer area Value buffer area
16 (0x0A) - Write value buffer area
0 (0x0000) - 42336
(0xA560)
Area is dependent on settings (basic type)
6.2.4.1 Control bytes
These are the outputs which trigger functions of the circuit breaker.
Circuit breaker output assignment
Bit Value SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
0..3
Switching the circuit breaker
0 Not defined (no action)
1 Switch off (opening of the main contacts)
2 Switch on (closing of the main contacts)
0 / 1
3 Not defined (no action)
2 A currently active tripping operation is acknowledged and reset
3 Not used
4 Setting of the free user output Not used
5 Not used
6 Not used
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 127
Bit Value SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
7 Not used
8 Not used
9 Not used
10 Delete tripping and event log
11 Reset all minimum/maximum value memories (on WL, except temperature)
12 Reset minimum/maximum value buffers for
temperatures
Not available
13 Not used
14 Reset all maintenance information and counters which can be reset
15 Bit for synchronizing the system time to the current half hour
6.2.4.2 Status bytes
These are the inputs which return the status of the circuit breaker.
(Included in each basic type as "binary status information").
Circuit breaker input assignment
Bit Value SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
0..3
Position of circuit breaker
0 Disconnected position
1 Connected position
2 Test position
0 / 1
3 Breaker is not available
Not available
0 is always transferred
0..3
Status of the circuit breaker
0 Not ready
1 OFF
2 ON
2 / 3
3 Breaker has tripped
4 Ready-to-close signal available Not available
5 Undervoltage release Not available
6 Spring energy store is compressed Not available
7 Overload warning present
8 An activated threshold has been exceeded Not available
9 An alarm signal is currently present Not available
10 Write protection disable deactivated, changes allowed
11 Status of the free user output —
12 /13 /14 0..7
Reason for last tripping operation
0 No tripping operation or last tripping operation acknowledged
1 Overload tripping (L)
2 Instantaneous short circuit
3 Short time-delayed short circuit (I)
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
128 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Bit Value SENTRON WL SENTRON VL
4 Ground fault (G)
5 Tripping operation as a result of extended
protection function
Tripping operation as a result of extended
protection function (temperature)
6
7
Overload in neutral conductor
15 Load shedding alarm Not available
6.2.4.3 Basic type data
Due to the large volume of data provided by the SENTRON circuit breakers, there was a
desire to find a compromise between data volume and performance on MODBUS. If each
piece of data is retrieved individually when transferring large amounts of data, this has an
adverse effect on performance capability on MODBUS.
In the interests of efficient and flexible transfer, there is therefore a choice of three basic
types.
Depending on the application:
● The basic type is selected according to the volume of data.
● The data blocks included are defined by customer need, depending on the data required.
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Low
Description
40964 0xA004 LOW Basic type of MODBUS data transfer
40965 0xA005 - Data in the cyclic profile of MODBUS
For more information about formats refer to Chapter Formats (Page 243)
Basic type 1
Byte Definition Default Data point
0 / 1 Binary status information Binary status information
2 / 3 Data block 1 Current in phase 1 380
4 / 5 Data block 2 Current in phase 2 381
6 / 7 Data block 3 Current in phase 3 382
8 / 9 Data block 4 Max. current in phase under highest load 374
10 PB of data block 1 PB of current phase 1
11 PB of data block 2 PB of current phase 2
12 PB of data block 3 PB of current phase 3
13 PB of data block 4 PB of maximum current in
phase under highest load
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 129
Basic type 2
Basic type 2 is pre-assigned for metering function.
Byte Definition Default Data point
0 / 1 Binary status information Binary status information
2 / 3 Data block 1 Current in phase 1 380
4 / 5 Data block 2 Current in phase 2 381
6 / 7 Data block 3 Current in phase 3 382
8 / 9 Data block 4 Max. current in phase under highest load 374
10 / 11 Data block 5 Current in neutral conductor 375
12 / 13 Data block 6 Mean value of the phase-to-phase voltages 203 *
14 / 15 Data block 7 Mean value of power factors of 3 phases 168 *
16 / 17 Data block 8 Total active energy of 3 phases 238 *
18 PB of data block 1 PB of current phase 1
19 PB of data block 2 PB of current phase 2
20 PB of data block 3 PB of current phase 3
21 PB of data block 4 PB of max. current in phase under highest load
22 PB of data block 5 PB of current in neutral conductor
23 PB of data block 6 PB of the mean value of phase-to-phase
voltages
24 PB of data block 7 PB of the mean value of the three power
factors
25 PB of data block 8 PB of total active energy
* Alternatively, these fields can contain the default numbers of basic type 3.
If there are no changes here, the default value is nevertheless transferred.
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
130 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Basic type 3
Basic type 3 consists of 14 data blocks and has input data in the 44th byte on the PLC.
Byte Definition Default Data point
0 / 1 Binary status information Binary status information
2 / 3 Data block 1 Current in phase 1 380
4 / 5 Data block 2 Current in phase 2 381
6 / 7 Data block 3 Current in phase 3 382
8 / 9 Data block 4 Max. current in phase under highest load 374
10 / 11 Data block 5 Current in neutral conductor 375
12 / 13 Data block 6 Phase-to-phase voltage L12 197
14 / 15 Data block 7 Phase-to-phase voltage L23 198
16 / 17 Data block 8 Phase-to-phase voltage L31 199
18 / 19 Data block 9 Neutral point voltage L1N 200
20 / 21 Data block 10 Neutral point voltage L2N 201
22 / 23 Data block 11 Neutral point voltage L3N 202
24 / 25 Data block 12 Mean value of power factors of 3 phases 168
26 / 27 Data block 13 Total active energy of 3 phases 238
28 / 29 Data block 14 Total apparent power of 3 phases 217
30 PB of data block 1 PB of current phase 1
31 PB of data block 2 PB of current phase 2
32 PB of data block 3 PB of current phase 3
33 PB of data block 4 PB of max. current in phase under highest
load
34 PB of data block 5 PB of current in neutral conductor
35 PB of data block 6 PB of the phase-to-phase voltage L12
36 PB of data block 7 PB of the phase-to-phase voltage L23
37 PB of data block 8 PB of the phase-to-phase voltage L31
38 PB of data block 9 PB of the neutral point voltage L1N
39 PB of data block 10 PB of the neutral point voltage L2N
40 PB of data block 11 PB of the neutral point voltage L3N
41 PB of data block 12 PB of the mean value of the three power
factors
42 PB of data block 13 PB of total active energy
43 PB of data block 14 PB of total apparent power
6.2.4.4 Value buffer area
For more information refer to Chapter Formats (Page 243).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 131
6.2.5 Function codes
Function codes control the data exchange. In doing so, a function code tells the node what
action it is to take.
6.2.5.1 Function "01 – Read output bits"
This function reads the control bytes in the circuit breaker.
Request to node
An example of the request to read all control bytes from the circuit breaker.
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x01 Function code "01 – Read output bits"
0x00 Start address (high)
0x00 Start address (low)
Address 0 onwards
0x00 Number of bits (high)
0x10 Number of bits (low)
Read 16 bits
0x3D CRC check code "low"
0xA0 CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
The response returns the control bytes.
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x01 Function code "01 – Read output bits"
0x02 Number of bytes 2 bytes => 16 bits
0x□□ Data byte 1 Bit 0 …7
0x□□ Data byte 2 Bit 8 … 15
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
132 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.2 Function "02 – Read input"
This function gets the status of the circuit breaker.
Request to node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x02 Function code "02 – Read input"
0x00 Start address (high)
0x00 Start address (low)
Address 0 onwards
0x00 Number of bits (high)
0x10 Number of bits (low)
Read 16 bits
0x3D CRC check code "low"
0xA0 CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x02 Function code "02 – Read input"
0x02 Number of bytes 2 bytes => 16 bits
0x□□ Data byte 1 Bit 0 …7
0x□□ Data byte 2 Bit 8 … 15
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 133
6.2.5.3 Function "03 – Read value buffer area"
This function gets values from the value buffer area of the circuit breaker.
Request to node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x03 Function code "03 – Read value buffer area"
0x00 Start address (high)
0x00 Start address (low)
Address 0 onwards
0x00 Number of registers (high)
0x02 Number of registers (low)
Read 2 registers (4 bytes)
0xC4 CRC check code "low"
0x6D CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x03 Function code "03 – Read value buffer area"
0x04 Number of bytes 2 bytes => 16 bits
0x□□ Data byte 1 (high)
0x□□ Data byte 2 (low)
1stregister
0x□□ Data byte 3 (high)
0x□□ Data byte 4 (low)
2nd register
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
134 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.4 Function "04 – Read basic type data"
The function reads all basic type data of a circuit breaker. Depending on the settings, the
structure and length of the requestable data may vary.
Note
Function 04 is not supported by communication module "COM21".
Request to node
An example for reading the 22 "basic type 3" registers of a circuit breaker at MODBUS
address 7.
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x04 Function code "04 – Read basic type data"
0x00 Start address (high)
0x00 Start address (low)
Address 0 onwards
0x00 Number of registers (high)
0x16 Number of registers (low)
Read 22 registers (44 bytes)
0x71 CRC check code "low"
0xA2 CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x04 Function code "04 – Read basic type data"
0x2C Number of bytes 44 bytes
0x□□ Data byte 1 (high)
0x□□ Data byte 2 (low)
1st register
… … …
0x□□ Data byte 43 (high)
0x□□ Data byte 44 (low)
22nd register
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 135
6.2.5.5 Function "05 – Write individual output"
This function is used to write the control bytes for the circuit breaker.
Note
Command bits like the example below are edge-sensitive and must be reset each time they
are used.
Request to node
This example shows how to set the bit for deleting the logbook entries in a circuit breaker
with MODBUS address 7.
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x05 Function code "05 – Write individual output"
0x00 Bit address (high)
0x0A Bit address (low)
Bit 10:
"Delete logbooks"
0xFF Control code (high)
0x00 Control code (low)
0xFF00 = Set bit
(0x0000 = Reset bit)
0xAC CRC check code "low"
0x5E CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x05 Function code "05 – Write individual output"
0x00 Bit address (high)
0x0A Bit address (low)
Bit 10:
"Delete logbooks"
0xFF Control code (high)
0x00 Control code (low)
0xFF00 = Bit set
(0x0000 = Bit not set)
0xAC CRC check code "low"
0x5E CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
136 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.6 Function "07 – Read diagnostic information"
Note
Function 07 is not supported by communication module "COM21".
Request to node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x07 Function code "07 – Read diagnostic information"
0x42 CRC check code "low" Check calculation value
0x42 CRC check code "high" (CRC16)
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x07 Function code "07 – Read diagnostic information"
0x□□ Diagnostic information byte Refer to table
0x□□ CRC check code "low" Check calculation value
0x□□ CRC check code "high" (CRC16)
Diagnostic information byte
Meaning
WL VL
Bit
(COM16) (COM11) (COM21)
0 1 = Contact load too high
1 1 = Communication with ETU present
2 1 = Communication module is OK
3 1 = ROM test OK
4 1 = Time test OK
5 1 = RAM test OK
6
not used,
always 0
1 = Static RAM
test passed
7 not used,
always 0
Function not supported
Response:
Exception message "01"
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 137
6.2.5.7 Function "08 – Diagnostics"
Note
Function 08 is not supported by communication module "COM21".
This function comprises 2 subfunctions which can be used for diagnosis:
Subfunction selection
The diagnostic code defines the subfunction:
● 0x0000 Resend test data
● 0x000A Reset communication counter
(see function 12)
Resend test data
This function is used for checking communication between the master and the node.
Request to node (resend test data)
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x08 Function code "08 – Diagnostics"
0x00 Diagnostic code (high)
0x00 Diagnostic code (low)
0x0000 = Resend test data
0xF0 Test data (high)
0xA5 Test data (low)
Test data for resend check
(0xF0A5)
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node (resend test data)
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x08 Function code "08 – Diagnostics"
0x00 Diagnostic code (high)
0x00 Diagnostic code (low)
0x0000 = Resend test data
0xF0 Test data (high)
0xA5 Test data (low)
Test data for resend check
(0xF0A5)
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
138 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Reset communication counter
The communication module maintains statistics, which can be read using the following
functions:
● "Function 11 – Get number of messages"
● "Function 12 – Communication events"
This command resets all statistics.
Note
Test data has to be transferred with 0x0000, otherwise an exception occurs with exception
code "03 – Illegal value".
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 139
6.2.5.8 Function "11 – Get number of messages"
Function "11 – Get number of messages"
Request to node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x0B Function code "11 – Get number of messages"
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x0B Function code "11 – Get number of messages"
0x00 Status (high)
0x00 Status (low)
0x0000 = COM not busy
(0xFFFF = COM still busy)
0x00 Message number (high)
0x10 Message number (low)
Number of correct messages (16)
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
140 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.9 Function code "12 – Communication events"
Note
Function 12 is not supported by communication module "COM21".
Request to node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x0B Function code "12 – Communication events"
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x00 Status (low) (0xFFFF = COM still busy)
0x00 Message number OK (high)
0x10 Message number OK (low)
Number of correct messages (16)
0x00 Message number total (high)
0x10 Message number total (low)
Number of transmitted messages (16)
0x80 01: Message status (receipt)
0x40 02: Message status (send)
FIFO - message status 1
(last message)
0x80 63: Message status (receipt)
0x40 64: Message status (send)
FIFO - message status 32
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value (CRC16)
Message status (receipt)
Bit Description
0 Not used
1 Communication error
2 Not used
3 Not used
4 Character buffer overflow
5 Always 0, "Listen-only mode" not supported
6 Receive message to all users ("broadcast")
7 always 1
Message status (send)
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 141
Bit Description
0 Exception for read errors (exception code 1-3)
1 Exception for node stop (exception code 4)
2 Exception for node busy (exception code 5-6)
3 Exception for node error (exception code 7)
4 Time error occurred when writing
5 Always 0, "Listen-only mode" not supported
6 always 1
7 always 0
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
6.2.5.10 Function "15 – Write output block"
Writing multiple outputs in one command.
Request to node
In this example the status bytes of the circuit breaker are written:
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x0F Function code "15 – Write output block"
0x00 Bit start address (high) Write block from bit 0
0x00
0x00
Bit start address (low)
Bit number (high) Number of bits to write (16)
0x10 Bit number (low)
0x02 Number of bytes:
0x02 Data byte 1 (low) - bit 0..7
Number of data bytes (1)
Coded bits
0xCC Data byte 2 (high) - bit 8..15
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
142 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
6.2.5.11 Function "16 – Write value buffer area"
This command can be used to write complete data areas or complex data types and transfer
them to the value buffer area.
Request to node
The system time area for communication modules COM16 was chosen for this example.
The command below sets the time of the circuit breaker (system time) to the following date
and time:
● Wednesday. May 27, 2009, 11:15:30:000
Note
The time of communication module COM21 is located in a different area, so the
command would have to be changed accordingly:
• Register start address: 0x142A
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x10 Function code "16 – Write value buffer area"
0x44 Register start address (high) Write from system time
0x02 Register start address (low) DS 68 (0x44); Offset 2nd register
0x00 Register number (high) Number to be written
0x04 Register number (low) Register (4 - system time only)
0x08 Number of bytes: Number of data bytes (8)
0x09 Data byte 1 (low) -> year
0x05 Data byte 2 (high) -> month
Register 1
0x27 Data byte 3 (low) -> day
0x11 Data byte 4 (high) -> hour
Register 2
0x15 Data byte 5 (low) -> minute
0x30 Data byte 6 (high) -> second
Register 3
0x00 Data byte 7 (low) -> . . .
0x04 Data byte 8 (high) -> . . .
Register 4
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Response from node
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x10 Function code "16 – Write value buffer area"
0x44 Register start address (high) Write from system time
0x02 Register start address (low) DS 68 (0x44); Offset 2nd register
0x00 Register number (high) Number to be written
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 143
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x04 Register number (low) Register (4 - system time only)
0x□□ CRC check code "low" Check calculation value
(CRC16)
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Error from node
For more information, see Summary of exception messages (Page 143).
6.2.5.12 Summary of exception messages
With the exception of broadcast message frames, the requestor expects to receive a
response. There are four possible events that can occur following a request:
1. The node receives the request without communication errors and can process the
request, so the normal response is sent by the node.
2. The node does not receive the request because of a communication error. The node
does not send a response. The master should install a TIMEOUT for such situations.
3. The node receives an invalid request (parity or CRC). Once again no response is sent.
The master should install a TIMEOUT for such situations.
4. The node receives a request which it cannot process (e.g. reading a non-existent output
or value range). It responds with an exception message. The exception code in this
exception message indicates the cause of the problem.
The exception message contains two fields which differ from a normal response:
● Field for function code: In a normal message the node repeats the requested function
code. In an exception message the most significant bit indicates that an error has
occurred (= addition of 0x80). This information enables the master to interpret the error
code in the next field.
● Field for data: In a normal response the content is dependent on the function code. In
exception messages only the error code is returned. This contains the reason for/status
of the exception message.
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.2 Modbus RTU
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
144 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Example of exception message:
Bytes Name of byte Description
0x07 Node address MODBUS address 7
0x83 Function code +
error code (0x80)
Error code +
"03 – Read value buffer area"
0x02 Error code 02 - Illegal address
0x□□ CRC check code "low"
0x□□ CRC check code "high"
Check calculation value
(CRC16)
Error code for exception messages
Code Name Explanation
0x01 Illegal function The function code received in the request is an illegal function for
the node.
0x02 Illegal address The data address received is not in a legal address range for the
node.
0x03 Illegal value A value transferred in the request is not in the legal range for the
node
0x04 Node error An unknown error occurred during processing of the request at the
node.
0x05 Confirmation The request is being processed and a certain processing time is
required. This message is used to prevent a timeout error and to
allow processing of the request to be completed.
0x06 Node busy The node is still processing and the request is rejected. A new
request will have to be sent when the node is not busy.
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.3 Transition to TCP/IP networks
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 145
6.3 Transition to TCP/IP networks
Requirements:
● MODBUS RTU is supported
A gateway is needed here to convert the interfaces.
One possible example is the PAC4200, which is often used in parallel with circuit breakers.
(WKHUQHW
7&3,3
56
6(175213$&
Figure 6-2 Serial gateway
For further information, refer to the relevant manuals/instructions:
SENTRON PAC4200 Power Monitoring Device System Manual:
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/de/34261595)
Modbus RTU data transfer
6.3 Transition to TCP/IP networks
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
146 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 147
powerconfig 7
Shared software platform
powerconfig
for SENTRON
The most important functions of
powerconfig
are described in this chapter.
powerconfig
(from Version 2.2) is used as a shared commissioning and maintenance tool for
the SENTRON VL and SENTRON WL circuit breakers with communication capability.
powerconfig
offers a standardized interface and a uniform operator control concept for the
activities to be carried out, such as
● Parameterizing
● Operating
● Monitoring, and
● Diagnosing.
powerconfig
currently supports German and English.
7.1 Brief description
With
powerconfig
, the communication-enabled circuit breakers can be very easily
parameterized at startup, monitored during operation, and meaningfully diagnosed for
service purposes. There is also the option of reading out diverse statistical data (e.g.
operating hours, cut-off currents, etc.) for the purpose of preventive maintenance. The user
is supported here by extensive help functions and plain text displays. Extensive functions
and suitable displays are available to the user for this purpose.
powerconfig
communicates with the SENTRON circuit breakers via Modbus RTU.
powerconfig
supports the standard Microsoft PC operating systems.
Thanks to clear display and simple operation, significant time savings are made both at the
commissioning stage and during operation. Device-specific validity checks are made on the
parameters entered. Faults can thus be prevented in advance. Input errors are prevented.
With
powerconfig
, the devices can be managed in a project structure.
Any device structure can be used within the project.
powerconfig
7.2 Delivery form
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
148 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Example project:
7.2 Delivery form
powerconfig
is free and can be downloaded in the Siemens Service & Support Portal
(http://support.automation.siemens.com/WW/view/en/50241697).
7.3 Software requirements
To be able to work with
powerconfig
, you must meet the following requirements:
Operating systems
● Microsoft Windows XP
● Microsoft Windows XP Prof. 32bit SP3. MUL OS
● Microsoft Windows 7 Professional (32bit)
● Microsoft Windows 7 Ultimate (32bit)
● Microsoft Windows 7 Home Basic (32bit)
Hardware
● RS485 interface
Required knowledge/notes
● Observe the operating instructions/manuals of the SENTRON circuit breakers
● You must be familiar with Microsoft Windows®
● Grayed-out buttons indicate that a particular function is not active or the value cannot be
changed.
powerconfig
7.4 Online with powerconfig
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 149
7.4 Online with powerconfig
For online operation, the circuit breaker must be connected with the PC/PG via
Modbus RTU.
Depending on the selected
powerconfig
function, an online connection to the device is
established or becomes permanent if already available (e.g. monitoring of measured
variables).
7.5 Offline with powerconfig
In offline mode, device parameters can be entered, processed and stored in a project file
before startup.
Parameter values are always entered in offline mode. They are exchanged between the
PC/PG and the device using the transfer functions.
powerconfig
7.6 User interface
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
150 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
7.6 User interface
The user interface of
powerconfig
is clearly structured to meet your specific requirements. It
consists of the familiar standard Windows functions and system-specific operator control
elements.
① Application frame – contains the name of the application, the title bar and the main menu. The title bar contains the
name of the open project as well as the product designation. If something in the project has been modified and not
yet saved, the project name is followed by the character "*"
② Button bar
③ Configuration – contains the "Library" and the "Devices" tree.
You can show and hide the "Library". To do so, select the menu "Window > Show Library".
The library contains the supported device types and the "Folder" object.
"Devices" window - The devices used in a project can be organized in a tree structure in the Devices pane. The
name of a device must be unique within a project.
④ Work area - Shows the available views for a device selected in the project (e.g. the function parameters or current
measured values for a PAC).
⑤ System protocol - Displays fault situations related to the project and its contents.
Figure 7-1 User interface
In general,
powerconfig
only displays those function elements or function parameters on the
operator interface that are relevant to a specific device version.
powerconfig
7.7 "Overview" view
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 151
7.7 "Overview" view
"Overview" view
The main overview allows the most important switch information of the SENTRON circuit
breaker to be captured at a glance.
Figure 7-2 "Overview" view
powerconfig
7.7 "Overview" view
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
152 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The main overview shows all the important information of the circuit breaker at a glance. It is
subdivided into several sections:
● Status display (breaker "On"/"Off", position in the guide frame);
– The background color green indicates that there is no active warning, trip operation or
threshold warning
– Red means the last trip operation has not yet been acknowledged
– Yellow means a warning or threshold warning is active.
● Current bar chart for the up-to-date current in the conductor/phase with the highest load.
● Time to tripping operation if an overload is currently active
● Current measured values and time
● Last event of the event log and last trip operation of the trip log
– Display of the last trip operation and the last event with the corresponding time stamp.
● Using the "On"/"Off" buttons
– Requirement: A motorized operating mechanism must be available on the breaker.
powerconfig
7.8 "Parameters" view
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 153
7.8 "Parameters" view
The parameter values for the devices are entered in this view.
In this view, the function settings possible for the selected device are displayed and can be
modified by the user.
It is also possible to compare the devices in the project.
Documenting the device data
The device data (e.g. MLFB) and the set function parameters can be saved in a project and
called up later. In this way, it is possible at any time (during maintenance, for example) to
compare device data with the original data and detect deviations immediately. It is also
possible to replace a device quickly and safely by transferring saved data.
All the views of
powerconfig
can be printed out.
The print information can be adapted flexibly to meet customer requirements.
powerconfig
7.9 Communication link to the circuit breakers
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
154 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
7.9 Communication link to the circuit breakers
7.9.1 USB/RS485 adapter as point-to-point link
The point-to-point link is required for initial startup of the circuit breakers since the
communication modules (3 and 5) are supplied with the standard address 126. If there are
several devices with the same address (126) in one network, communication problems can
result. It is therefore advisable to change the standard address by means of a point-to-point
link before integrating into the network.
You can find additional information in the 3WL or 3VL chapters.
①
powerconfig
from Version 2.2
② USB/RS485 adapter
③ COM16
④ 3WL
⑤ COM21/COM11
⑥ 3VL with communication
Figure 7-3 USB/RS485 adapter as point-to-point link
powerconfig
7.9 Communication link to the circuit breakers
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 155
7.9.2 USB/RS485 adapter
An RS485 connection is required for the communication link to the circuit breakers. This can
be established via a USB/RS485 adapter ②, for example. The adapter is not included in the
scope of supply of
powerconfig
.
①
powerconfig
from Version 2.2
② USB/RS485 adapter
③ COM16
④ 3WL
⑤ COM21/COM11
⑥ 3VL with communication
Figure 7-4 USB/RS485 adapter
powerconfig
7.9 Communication link to the circuit breakers
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
156 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
7.9.3 LAN/RS485 gateway
As well as the USB/RS485 adapter, it is also possible to use a LAN/RS485 gateway, such as
the PCA4200 ②. Communication is carried out via the gateway to the devices
(4, 6 or 7) in the RS485 network.
①
powerconfig
from Version 2.2
② PAC4200 as a gateway
③ COM16
④ 3WL
⑤ COM21/COM11
⑥ 3VL with communication
⑦ PAC3100
Figure 7-5 LAN/RS485 gateway
Note
If the COM modules are to be addressed with the help of
powerconfig
a point-to-point
connection between the PC/PG and the communication module (COM16, COM11 or
COM21) is required. It is not possible to modify addresses via a LAN/RS485 gateway
connection.
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 157
Data library 8
8.1 The data library
The communication system of the SENTRON circuit breakers is extremely versatile and
flexible. The majority of data points can be read, and to a certain extent written, via register
blocks. Many of them can be integrated into the basic types. This chapter provides a detailed
description of the different data points and their properties.
General
The basis for the shared profile of the SENTRON circuit breakers is an overall database
referred to as a data library. This data library defines which circuit breaker supports which
data points.
Properties of the data points
The data library also describes the properties of all data points:
● What is the data point number of this data point and what is its name?
● What is the source of this data point?
● What is the format of this data point?
● What is the size of this data point?
● What is the scaling of this data point?
● Which register address does the data point start with?
● In which register block is this data point available?
8.2 Chapter overview
This chapter describes the data points of the data library.
● In the first section, the data points are combined into function classes. Function classes
are, for example, data for identification, device parameters, or measured values. This
subdivision quickly enables users to find the desired data point and its properties.
● The second part of this chapter describes the structure of the read/write register blocks
that in turn consist of the data points described in the previous section. This allows the
register blocks transferred via Modbus RTU to be interpreted in the master.
● The third section of this chapter describes the different formats of the data points. This
includes the description of the Motorola format used, e.g. "int" and "unsigned int", as well
as, above all, the description of special formats. A special format is, for example, the
binary breakdown of the data point that specifies the last tripping operation.
Data library
8.3 Scaling
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
158 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.3 Scaling
The measured values are always transferred as integer values (format "INTEGER" = "INT")
and never as Floating Point numbers (format "REAL"). These values can be signed. For this,
a scaling factor must be added in the case of some measured values so that the transferred
measured value can be correctly interpreted. The scaling factor to be displayed in each case
can be taken from the table shown below (from "data points").
Frequency example
The measured value of the current frequency (data point #262) varies between 15.00 and
440.00 Hz. The decimal places could not be communicated using the INTEGER format
without scaling. For this reason, the measured value is scaled with 102, and a value of
between 1500 and 44000 is communicated. At the receiver end (MODBUS master), this
value must now be multiplied by the scaling factor corresponding to the exponent of 10 (-2,
multiplication by 10-2). The exponent at the receiver end is always specified for the scaling
factor.
8.4 Abbreviations of the data sources
Table 8- 1 The following abbreviations are used in the data sources:
Abbreviation Meaning
ETU Electronic trip unit
Meter. fct. Metering function or metering function PLUS
DI Digital input module
DO Digital output module
BDA PLUS Breaker Data Adapter PLUS
BSS Breaker Status Sensor
conf. DO Configurable digital output module
Data library
8.5 Units
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 159
8.5 Units
The measured values have the following measuring units unless otherwise indicated in the
tables:
Measured value Measuring unit Name
Current A Ampere
Voltage V Volts
Power kW kilowatt
Power kVA kilovolt ampere
Reactive power kVAr kilovolt ampere (reactive)
Energy kWh kilowatt/hour
Reactive energy kVArh kilovolt ampere (reactive)/hour
Energy MWh megawatt/hour
Reactive energy MVArh Megavolt ampere (reactive)/hour
Temperature °C Degrees Celsius
THD/form factor/peak factor % Percent
Frequency Hz Hertz
Delay time s Seconds
This also applies to the min./max. values.
8.6 Function classes
8.6.1 Function classes of the data points
In this section, the data points are combined into function classes. Function classes are, for
example, data for identification, device parameters, or measured values. This subdivision
quickly enables users to find the desired data point and its properties.
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
160 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.2 Data points for controlling the SENTRON circuit breakers
The SENTRON circuit breakers can be controlled with the data points listed in the table
below (e.g. switch on, switch off, and also functions that control the CubicleBUS modules).
Table 8- 2 Data points for controlling the circuit breaker
Description Data
point
Source WL Contained in
RB.Byte
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
Controls the functions/commands (e.g.
reset min./max. values) of the
communication module
18 COM16 DS51.181 Format
(18)
8 —
Controls the outputs of the communication
module (e.g. switching the breaker)
19 COM16 DS93.10 Format
(19)
8 —
Date of the last parameter change 84 COM16 DS51.182 Time 64 —
System time of the circuit breaker 90 COM16 DS93.11 Time 64 —
Controls the digital output module 1 121 DO1 DS91.10 Format
(121)
8 —
Controls the digital output module 2 126 DO2 DS51.194 Format
(121)
8 —
Controls the trip unit 406 ETU DS68.4
DS52.44*
Format
(406)
16 —
6 Modbus RTU bits for the digital
configurable output module
426 COM16 DS93.8 Format
(426)
6 —
* COM21 only
8.6.3 Data points for detailed diagnostics of the SENTRON circuit breakers
The SENTRON circuit breakers provide a host of data for detailed diagnostics shown in the
table below:
Table 8- 3 Data points for detailed diagnostics of the SENTRON circuit breakers
Description Data
point
Source WL Contained in
RB.Byte
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
Write protection (DPWriteEnable) 14 COM16 DS69.11 Format (14) 1 —
Trip log of the last 5 tripping operations with
time
15 COM16 DS51.0 Format (15) 480 —
Event log of the last 10 events with time 16 COM16 DS51.60 Format (16) 960 —
Number of switching operations under load 80 COM16 DS92.42 unsigned int 16 0
Number of switching operations caused by
trips
81 COM16 DS91.0 unsigned int 16 0
Switching cycle counter (for switching cycle
on/off)
82 COM16 DS91.2 unsigned int 16 0
Runtime meter (when On + current > 0) 83 COM16 DS91.4 unsigned long 32 0
Number of short-circuit trips (SI) 104 ETU DS91.6 unsigned int 16 0
Number of overload trips (L) 105 ETU DS91.18 unsigned int 16 0
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 161
Description Data
point
Source WL Contained in
RB.Byte
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
Number of ground-fault tripping operations
(G)
106 ETU DS91.20 unsigned int 16 0
Total of deactivated I²t values L1, L2, L3, N 107 ETU DS91.22 Format (107) 128 0
Tripping operations by metering function
PLUS
307 Meter. fct.
PLUS
DS91.24 Format (307) 16 —
Threshold warnings 308 Meter. fct.
PLUS
DS92.28 Format (308) 32 —
Harmonics of current/voltage to the 29th 309 Meter. fct.
PLUS
DS92.30 Format (309) 928 0
Order number of the trip unit 371 ETU DS64.0 18 x char 144 —
Time until presumed overload trip 379 ETU DS97.126 unsigned int 16 0
Last unacknowledged tripping operation of
the trip unit
401 ETU DS51.1 Format (401) 8 —
Currently pending alarms 402 ETU DS92.26 Format (402) 16 —
Current at the moment of shutdown 403 ETU DS92.24 unsigned int 16 0(VL)/1
Phase at the moment of shutdown 404 ETU DS92.34 Format (373) 3 —
Switch position at the digital input module 1 111 DI1 DS92.36 Format (111) 8 —
Switch position at the digital input module 2 115 DI2 DS69.3 Format (111) 8 —
Switch position at the digital output module
1
119 DO1 DS69.4 Format (119) 8 —
Switch position at the digital output module
2
124 DO2 DS69.5 Format (119) 8 —
Shows the phase with maximum load 373 ETU DS69.6 Format (373) 3 —
Position and status of the circuit breaker in
the frame
24 COM16 DS51.183 Format (24) 4 —
Modules connected to the CubicleBUS 88 COM16 DS52.24* Format (88) 32 —
Status of the inputs of the digital input
module 1
110 DI1 DS51.202 Hex 8 —
Status of the inputs of the digital input
module 2
114 DI2 DS92.37 Hex 8 —
Status of outputs of the digital output
module 1
118 DO1 DS52.25* Hex 8 —
Status of outputs of the digital output
module 2
123 DO2 DS92.20 Hex 8 —
Status of the connected MODBUS 17 COM16 DS91.48 Format (17) 3 —
Status of the circuit breaker
(on/off/powered, etc.)
328 BSS DS69.0 Format (328) 8 —
Maintenance information about the main
contacts
405 ETU DS69.1 Format (405) 2 —
* COM21 only
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
162 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.4 Data points for identifying the SENTRON circuit breakers
The SENTRON circuit breakers provide a host of data for detailed diagnostics shown in the
table below:
Table 8- 4 Data points for identifying the SENTRON circuit breakers
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained in
DS.Byte
User text (freely editable) 20 COM16 — COM21 64 x char 512 — DS165.4
Plant identifier (freely
editable)
21 COM16 — — 64 x char 512 — DS165.68
Date (freely editable) 22 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS165.132
Author (freely editable) 23 COM16 — — 30 x char 240 — DS165.140
Identification number of
COM
91 COM16 COM11 COM21 16 x char 128 — DS162.4
Market in which the trip unit
is used
95 ETU — COM21 Format (95) 2 — DS97.47
Identification number of
circuit breaker
96 ETU — — 20 x char 160 — DS97.48
Test date of switch 98 ETU — — Time 64 — DS97.74
DS100.4
Switching capacity class 99 ETU — — Format (99) 4 — DS97.82
Size 100 ETU — — Format (100) 2 — DS97.83
Rated voltage (LL) of the
circuit breaker
101 ETU — — unsigned int 16 0 DS97.84
Rated current of the
external g transformer
102 ETU — — unsigned int 16 0 DS97.86
DS129.70
Order number of the circuit
breaker (on the
SENTRON VL, this is the
order number of the trip
unit)
103 ETU ETU — Format (103) 160 — DS162.20
DS97.88
Number of poles of circuit
breaker
108 ETU ETU ETU Format (108) 3 — DS97.144
Type (metering function,
metering function PLUS)
138 Meter.
fct.
— — Format (138) 8 — DS162.40
Rating plug 377 ETU ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS51.208
DS97.146
Circuit breaker frame 378 ETU ETU ETU unsigned int 16 0 DS97.148
Order number of the trip
unit
407 ETU ETU — 16 x char 144 — DS97.0
Date of manufacture of trip
unit
408 ETU — — Time 64 — DS97.18
Identification number of trip
unit
409 ETU ETU — 17 x char 136 — DS97.26
N transformer connected 411 ETU ETU ETU Format (411) 1 — DS97.45
Type of trip unit 412 ETU ETU ETU Format (412) 5 — DS162.41
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 163
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained in
DS.Byte
Order number COM11 424 — COM11 — 16 x char 128 — DS97.154
Serial number
COM11/COM21
425 — COM11 COM21 16 x char 128 — DS97.170
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
164 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.5 Data points for measured values current
The table below contains the data points for measured values current:
Table 8- 5 Data points for measured values current
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained
in DS.Byte
Phase unbalance current (as %) 172 Meter.
fct.
ETU ETU unsigned c
har
8 0 DS94.0
Long-time mean value of 3-phase
current
193 Meter.
fct.
ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.2
Long-time mean value of current L1 194 Meter.
fct.
ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.4
Long-time mean value of current L2 195 Meter.
fct.
ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.6
Long-time mean value of current L3 196 Meter.
fct.
ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.8
Minimum long-time mean value for
current
244 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.24
Maximum long-time mean value for
current
245 Meter.
fct.
— COM21 unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.26
Current of phase with maximum load 374 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS51.186
DS52.6*
Current in neutral conductor 375 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS51.190
DS94.18
DS52.8*
Current which flows to ground 376 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS51.192
DS94.20
DS52.10*
Current in phase 1 380 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.10
Current in phase 2 381 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.12
Current in phase 3 382 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.14
Mean current value over the three
phases
383 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.16
Minimum current in phase 1 384 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.0
Maximum current in phase 1 385 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.2
Minimum current in phase 2 386 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.4
Maximum current in phase 2 387 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.6
Minimum current in phase 3 388 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.8
Maximum current in phase 3 389 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.10
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 165
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained
in DS.Byte
Minimum current in neutral conductor 390 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.12
Maximum current in neutral
conductor
391 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.14
Minimum current which flows to
ground
392 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.16
Maximum current which flows to
ground
393 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.18
Minimum mean value over the three
phases
394 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.20
Maximum mean value over the three
phases
395 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS72.22
* COM21 only
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
166 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.6 Data points for measured values voltage
The table below contains the data points for measured values voltage:
Table 8- 6 Data points for measured values voltage
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Phase unbalance voltage (in %) 173 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS94.22
Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L1 and L2
197 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.24
Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L2 and L3
198 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.26
Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L3 and L1
199 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.28
Neutral point voltage phase L1 200 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.30
Neutral point voltage phase L2 201 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.32
Neutral point voltage phase L3 202 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.34
Mean value of phase-to-phase voltage 203 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.36
Mean value of neutral-point star voltage 204 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.38
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
205 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.0
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
206 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.2
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
207 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.4
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
208 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.6
Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
209 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.8
Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
210 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.10
Minimum of the neutral point voltage
phase L1
211 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.12
Maximum of the neutral point voltage
phase L1
212 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.14
Minimum of the neutral point voltage
phase L2
213 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.16
Maximum of the neutral point voltage
phase L2
214 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.18
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 167
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Minimum of the neutral point voltage
phase L3
215 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.20
Maximum of the neutral point voltage
phase L3
216 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS73.22
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
168 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.7 Data points for measured values power
The table below contains the data points for measured values power:
Table 8- 7 Data points for measured values power
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained
in DS.Byte
Total apparent power 217 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.40
Apparent power in phase L1 218 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.62
Apparent power in phase L2 219 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.64
Apparent power in phase L3 220 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.66
Total active power 221 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.42
Active power in phase L1 222 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.44
Active power in phase L2 223 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.46
Active power in phase L3 224 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.48
Total reactive power 225 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.50
Reactive power in phase L1 226 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.76
Reactive power in phase L2 227 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.78
Reactive power in phase L3 228 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.80
Long-time mean value of 3-phase
active power
229 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.52
Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L1
230 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.54
Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L2
231 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.56
Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L3
232 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.58
Long-time mean value of 3-phase
apparent power
233 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.60
Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L1
234 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.68
Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L2
235 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.70
Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L3
236 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS94.72
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 169
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling Contained
in DS.Byte
Long-time mean value of 3-phase
reactive power
237 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS94.74
Minimum of the mean value of the
apparent power
246 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS74.4
Maximum of the mean value of the
apparent power
247 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS74.6
Minimum of the mean value of the
reactive power
248 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS74.12
Maximum of the mean value of the
reactive power
249 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS74.14
Minimum of the mean value of the
active power
250 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS74.8
Maximum of the mean value of the
active power
251 Meter.
fct.
— — signed int 16 0 DS74.10
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
170 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.8 Data points for other measured values
The table below contains the data points for other measured values :
Table 8- 8 Data points for other measured values
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Mean value of the power factor 168 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS51.184
DS94.98
Power factor in phase L1 169 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS94.100
Power factor in phase L2 170 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS94.102
Power factor in phase L3 171 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS94.104
Minimum of the mean value of the
power factor
242 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS74.0
Maximum of the mean value of the
power factor
243 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 - 3 DS74.2
Temperature in the control cabinet
(acc. in COM16)
71 COM16 — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS94.114
Minimum temperature in the control
cabinet
72 COM16 — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS77.0
Maximum temperature in the control
cabinet
73 COM16 — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS77.1
Temperature in circuit breaker (acc.
in BSS)
330 BSS — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS94.115
Minimum temperature in the circuit
breaker
74 COM16 — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS77.2
Maximum temperature in the circuit
breaker
75 COM16 — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS77.3
Active energy in normal direction
[MWh]
238 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.82
Active energy in normal direction
[kWh]
433 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.116
Active energy in reverse direction
[MWh]
239 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.86
Active energy in reverse direction
[kWh]
434 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.120
Reactive energy in normal direction
[MVarh]
240 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.90
Reactive energy in normal direction
[kVarh]
435 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.124
Reactive energy in reverse direction
[MVarh]
241 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.94
Reactive energy in reverse direction
[kVarh]
436 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
long
32 0 DS94.128
Frequency 3VL 396 — ETU — unsigned
int
16 - 2 DS94.112
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 171
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Frequency 262 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 - 2 DS94.106
Minimum frequency 252 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 - 2 DS76.2
Maximum frequency 253 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 - 2 DS76.0
THD of current 254 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS94.108
Minimum THD of current 255 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS76.4
Maximum THD of current 256 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS76.5
THD of voltage 257 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS94.109
Minimum THD of voltage 258 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS76.6
Maximum THD of voltage 259 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS76.7
Peak factor 260 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 - 1 DS94.111
Minimum peak factor 263 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 - 1 DS72.28
Maximum peak factor 264 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 - 1 DS72.29
Form factor 261 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 - 1 DS94.110
Minimum form factor 265 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 - 1 DS72.30
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
172 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.9 Data points for the time stamp (TS) of the measured values
The table below contains the data points for the time stamp (TS) of the measured values:
Table 8- 9 Data points for the time stamp (TS) of the measured values
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
TS minimum current in phase L1 25 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.32
TS maximum current in phase L1 26 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.40
TS minimum current in phase L2 27 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.48
TS maximum current in phase L2 28 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.56
TS minimum current in phase L3 29 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.64
TS maximum current in phase L3 30 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.72
TS minimum current in neutral
conductor
33 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.112
TS maximum current in neutral
conductor
34 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.120
TS minimum current that flows to
ground
35 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.128
TS maximum current that flows to
ground
36 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.136
TS minimum mean value over the
three phases
31 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.80
TS maximum mean value over the
three phases
32 COM16 COM11 — Time 64 — DS72.88
TS minimum long-time mean value for
current
55 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.96
TS maximum long-time mean value of
current
56 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.104
TS minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
37 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.24
TS maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
38 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.32
TS minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
39 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.40
TS maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
40 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.48
TS minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
41 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.56
TS maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
42 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.64
TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
43 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.72
TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
44 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.80
TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L2
45 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.88
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 173
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L2
46 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.96
TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
47 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.104
TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
48 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS73.112
TS minimum of the mean value of the
apparent power
57 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.16
TS maximum of the mean value of the
apparent power
58 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.24
TS minimum of the mean value of the
active power
49 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.32
TS maximum of the mean value of the
active power
50 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.40
TS minimum of the mean value of the
reactive power
51 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.48
TS maximum of the mean value of the
reactive power
52 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.56
TS minimum of the mean value of the
power factor
53 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.64
TS maximum of the mean value of the
power factor
54 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS74.72
TS minimum temperature in the control
cabinet
76 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS77.4
TS maximum temperature in the
control cabinet
77 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS77.12
TS minimum temperature in the circuit
breaker
78 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS77.20
TS maximum temperature in the circuit
breaker
79 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS77.28
TS minimum frequency 59 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.8
TS maximum frequency 60 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.16
TS minimum THD of current 61 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.24
TS maximum THD of current 62 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.32
TS minimum THD of voltage 63 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.40
TS maximum THD of voltage 64 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS76.48
TS minimum peak factor 65 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.144
TS maximum peak factor 66 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.152
TS minimum form factor 67 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.160
TS maximum form factor 68 COM16 — — Time 64 — DS72.168
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
174 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.10 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (primary protection function)
The table below contains the parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (primary
protection function):
Table 8- 10 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (primary protection function)
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Active parameter set 370 ETU — ETU Format
(370)
1 — DS129.65
Time lag class (SENTRON VL
LCD ETU40M only)
331 — ETU ETU Format
(331)
8 0 DS129.68
Overload parameter IR parameter set
A (PS A)
333 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.4
Time-lag class tR PS A 335 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 – 1 DS129.8
Short-circuit protection instantaneous
Ii PS A
336 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 1 /
0 (VL)
DS129.10
Short-circuit protection delayed Isd
PS A
337 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 1 /
0 (VL)
DS129.12
Delay time for short-circuit protection
tsd PS A
338 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 –3 DS129.14
Overload protection neutral conductor
IN PS A (WL)
334 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.6
Overload protection neutral conductor
IN (VL)
365 — ETU ETU unsigned
char
8 0 DS129.66
Ground-fault protection Ig PS A 339 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.16
Delay time for ground-fault protection
tg PS A
340 ETU ETU ETU unsigned
int
16 – 3 DS129.18
Ground fault alarm Ig2 PS A 341 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.20
Delay time for ground fault alarm tg2
PS A
342 ETU ETU — unsigned
int
16 – 3 DS129.22
I4t characteristic for overload
protection PS A
345 ETU — — Format
(345)
1 — DS129.26
I2t characteristic for delayed short-
circuit protection PS A
343 ETU ETU ETU Format
(343)
1 — DS129.24
I2t characteristic for ground-fault
protection PS A
344 ETU ETU ETU Format
(344)
1 — DS129.25
Thermal memory PS A 346 ETU ETU ETU Format
(346)
1 — DS129.27
Phase loss sensitivity PS A 347 ETU — — Format
(347)
1 — DS129.28
Cooling time constant PS A 348 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.30
Overload parameter IR
parameter set B (PS B)
349 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.32
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 175
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Length
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Time-lag class tR PS B 351 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 – 1 DS129.36
Short-circuit protection instantaneous
Ii PS B
352 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 1 DS129.38
Short-circuit protection delayed Isd
PS B
353 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 1 DS129.40
Delay time for short-circuit protection
tsd PS B
354 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 – 3 DS129.42
Overload protection neutral conductor
IN PS B
350 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.34
Ground-fault protection Ig PS B 355 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.44
Delay time for ground fault tg PS B 356 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 – 3 DS129.46
Ground fault alarm Ig2 PS B 357 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.48
Delay time for ground fault alarm tg2
PS B
358 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 – 3 DS129.50
I4t characteristic for overload
protection PS B
361 ETU — — Format
(345)
1 — DS129.54
I2t curve for delayed short-circuit
protection PS B
359 ETU — — Format
(343)
1 — DS129.52
I2t curve for ground-fault protection
PS B
360 ETU — — Format
(344)
1 — DS129.53
Thermal memory PS B 362 ETU — — Format
(346)
1 — DS129.55
Phase loss sensitivity PS B 363 ETU — — Format
(347)
1 — DS129.56
Cooling time constant PS B 364 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.58
Load shedding 367 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.60
Load pick up 368 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS129.62
Delay time for load shedding/pick up 366 ETU — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS129.64
Overload pre-alarm (VL only) 369 — ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.44
Active parameter set 370 ETU — ETU Format
(370)
1 — DS129.65
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
176 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.11 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (extended protection function)
The table below contains the parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (extended
protection function):
Table 8- 11 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (extended protection function)
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Current unbalance 139 Meter.
fct.
ETU ETU unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.41
Delay time for current unbalance 140 Meter.
fct.
ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.42
Active power in normal direction 141 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.14
Delay time for active power in normal
direction
142 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.18
Active power in reverse direction 143 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.16
Delay time for active power in reverse
direction
144 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.19
Underfrequency 147 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.22
Delay time for underfrequency 148 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.25
Overfrequency 149 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.26
Delay time for overfrequency 150 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.24
Voltage unbalance 151 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.32
Delay time for voltage unbalance 152 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.33
Undervoltage 153 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.34
Delay time for undervoltage 154 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.38
Overvoltage 155 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.36
Delay time for overvoltage 156 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.39
THD of current 158 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.28
Delay time of THD of current 159 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.29
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 177
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
THD of voltage 160 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.30
Delay time of THD of voltage 161 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.31
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
178 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.6.12 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (parameters for threshold value
alarms)
The table below contains the parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (parameters for
threshold warnings):
Table 8- 12 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (parameters for threshold warnings)
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Overcurrent 267 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.48
Delay time for overcurrent 268 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.56
Current that flows to ground 269 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.50
Delay time of current that flows to
ground
270 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.57
Overcurrent in neutral conductor 271 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
int
8 0 DS130.52
Delay time for overcurrent in neutral
conductor
272 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.58
Phase unbalance current 273 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.59
Delay time for current phase
unbalance
274 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.60
Long-time mean value of current 275 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.54
Delay time for long-time mean value
of current
276 Meter. fct. ETU — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.61
Undervoltage 277 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.62
Delay time for undervoltage 278 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.64
Phase unbalance voltage 279 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.65
Delay time for voltage phase
unbalance
280 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.66
Overvoltage 281 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.68
Delay time for overvoltage 282 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.70
Active power in normal direction 283 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.4
Delay time for active power in
normal direction
284 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.12
Active power in reverse direction 285 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.6
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 179
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Delay time for active power in
reverse direction
286 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.13
Power factor, capacitive 287 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 – 3 DS130.8
Delay time for power factor,
capacitive
288 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.14
Power factor, inductive 289 Meter. fct. — — signed int 16 – 3 DS130.10
Delay time for power factor,
inductive
290 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.15
Long-time mean value of active
power
291 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.30
Delay time for long-time mean value
of active power
292 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.34
Long-time mean value of apparent
power
293 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.32
Delay time for long-time mean value
of apparent power
294 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.35
Long-time mean value of reactive
power
295 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.36
Delay time for long-time mean value
of reactive power
296 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.40
Reactive power in normal direction 297 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.38
Delay time for reactive power in
normal direction
298 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.41
Reactive power in reverse direction 299 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.42
Delay time for reactive power in
reverse direction
300 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.46
Apparent power 301 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS130.44
Delay time for apparent power 302 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.47
Overfrequency 303 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.16
Delay time for overfrequency 304 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.17
Underfrequency 305 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.18
Delay time for underfrequency 306 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.19
THD current 319 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.20
Delay time for THD current 320 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.21
THD voltage 321 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.22
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
180 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scalin
g
Contained
in DS.Byte
Delay time for THD voltage 322 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.23
Peak factor 323 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 – 2 DS130.24
Delay time for peak factor 324 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.28
Form factor 325 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
int
16 – 2 DS130.26
Delay time for the form factor 326 Meter. fct. — — unsigned
char
8 0 DS130.29
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.6 Function classes
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 181
8.6.13 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (communication, measured value
adjustment, etc.)
The table below contains the parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (communication,
measured value adjustment, etc.):
Table 8- 13 Parameters of the SENTRON circuit breakers (communication, measured value adjustment, etc.)
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Source
VL 1
Source
VL 2
Format Lengt
h
(bits)
Scaling Contained
in DS.Byte
MODBUS address 5 COM16 COM11 COM21 unsigned
int
8 0 DS160.5
Basic type of MODBUS data transfer 6 COM16 COM11 COM21 Hex 2 — DS160.6
Data in the cyclic profile of MODBUS 7 COM16 COM11 COM21 Format
(7)
224 — DS160.8
IP address of the BDA PLUS 10 BDA
PLUS
— — Format
(10)
40 — DS160.42
Assignment of the configurable digital
output module
129 conf. DO — — Format
(129)
168 — DS128.46
Normal direction of incoming supply 145 Meter.
fct.
— — Format
(145)
1 — DS128.20
Direction of rotation of phase 146 Meter.
fct.
— — Format
(146)
1 — DS128.21
The voltage transformer can be star
or delta-connected on the primary
side
162 Meter.
fct.
— — Format
(162)
1 — DS128.4
Rated voltage of the system (on the
primary side)
164 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.6
Secondary voltage of transformer 165 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.8
Length of period for calculating long-
time mean value
166 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.9
Number of sub-periods for calculating
long-time mean value
167 Meter.
fct.
— — unsigned
char
8 0 DS128.10
Lower limit of power transmission 372 ETU — — unsigned
int
16 0 DS128.12
Ground fault transformer detection
type
410 ETU ETU ETU Format
(410)
2 — DS97.44
DS129.69
1 LCD ETU with COM11
2 communication-capable ETU with COM21
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
182 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
8.7.1 Register block RB 51 main overview
The table below shows the content of register block 51 that copies the most important
information from other register blocks and makes it available in the form of a complete
overview. This register block is used for displaying the data of the main overview.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 51: Main overview (length 119 registers,
read-only):
Table 8- 14 Content of register block 51
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data point Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
13057 0x3301 - Trip log of the last 5 tripping
operations with time
15 COM16 Format
(15)
480 —
13087 0x331F - Event log of the last 10 events
with time
16 COM16 Format
(16)
960 —
13147 0x335B LOW Status of the connected Modbus 17 COM16 Format
(17)
3 —
13147 0x335B HIGH Controls the commands/functions
(e.g. delete/reset min./max.
values) of the communication
module
18 COM16 Format
(18)
8 —
13148 0x335C LOW Controls the outputs of the
communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker)
19 COM16 Format
(19)
8 —
13148 0x335C HIGH Shows the phase with maximum
load
373 ETU Format
(373)
3 —
13149 0x335D - Mean value of the power factor 168 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
13150 0x335E - Current of phase with maximum
load
374 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13151 0x335F - Time until presumed overload trip 379 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13152 0x3360 - Current in neutral conductor 375 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13153 0x3361 - Current which flows to ground 376 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13154 0x3362 - System time of the circuit breaker 90 COM16 Time 64 —
13158 0x3366 LOW Position of the circuit breaker in
the frame
24 COM16 Format
(24)
4 —
13158 0x3366 HIGH Status of the circuit breaker
(on/off/powered, etc.)
328 BSS Format
(328)
8 —
13159 0x3367 - Overload parameter IR parameter
set A (PS A)
333 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 183
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data point Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
13160 0x3368 - Overload parameter IR parameter
set B (PS B)
349 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13161 0x3369 - Rating plug 377 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
13162 0x336A LOW Active parameter set 370 ETU Format
(370)
1 —
13162 0x336A - Reserved — — — 72 —
13167 0x336F LOW Property byte (trip log of the last 5
tripping operations with time)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13167 0x336F HIGH Property byte (event log of the
last 10 events with time)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13168 0x3370 LOW Property byte for byte 180 (status
of the connected Modbus)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13168 0x3370 HIGH Property byte (controls the
commands/functions (e.g.
delete/reset min./max. values) of
the communication module)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13169 0x3371 - Property byte (controls the
outputs of the communication
module (e.g. switching the
breaker))
— COM16 PB 8 —
13169 0x3371 HIGH Property byte for byte 183
(shows the phase with maximum
load)
— ETU PB 8 —
13170 0x3372 LOW Property byte (mean value of the
power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
13170 0x3372 HIGH Property byte (current of phase
with maximum load)
— ETU PB 8 —
13171 0x3373 LOW Property byte for byte 188 (time
until presumed overload trip)
— ETU PB 8 —
13171 0x3373 HIGH Property byte (current in neutral
conductor)
— ETU PB 8 —
13172 0x3374 LOW Property byte (current which flows
to ground)
— ETU PB 8 —
13172 0x3374 HIGH Property byte (system time of the
circuit breaker)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13173 0x3375 LOW Property byte (position of the
circuit breaker in the frame)
— COM16 PB 8 —
13173 0x3375 HIGH Property byte (status of the circuit
breaker (on/off/powered, etc.))
— BSS PB 8 —
13174 0x3376 LOW Property byte (overload
parameter IR parameter set A
(PS A))
— ETU PB 8 —
13174 0x3376 HIGH Property byte (overload
parameter IR parameter set B
(PS B))
— ETU PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
184 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data point Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
13175 0x3377 LOW Property byte (rating plug) — ETU PB 8 —
13175 0x3377 HIGH Property byte (active parameter
set)
— ETU PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 185
8.7.2 Register block RB 64 data of the harmonic analysis
The table below shows the content of register block 64 in which the components of the
harmonics of current and voltage are transmitted. The content is described in the format
(309). The property byte provides information as to whether the data point is available.
Generally, a harmonic analysis is only available with a SENTRON WL with metering function
PLUS.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 64: Data of the harmonic analysis (length
66 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 15 Content of register block 64
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Low
Description Data
point
Source WL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
16385 0x4001 - Harmonics of
current/voltage to the 29th
309 Meter. fct. Format
(309)
928 0
16443 0x403B - Reserved — — — 112 —
16450 0x4042 LOW Property byte (harmonics of
current/voltage to the 29th)
309 Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
186 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.3 Register block RB 68 data of the CubicleBUS module
The table below shows the content of register block 68 via which the outputs of the digital
output modules can be read and also controlled, and the system time can be read out. In
addition, it is possible to set the system time and also the outputs of the communication
module for switching breakers on or off.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 68: Data of the CubicleBUS module (length
23 registers, read/write):
Table 8- 16 Content of register block 68
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
17409 0x4401 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
17411 0x4403 - System time of the circuit breaker 90 COM16 Time 64 —
17415 0x4407 LOW Controls the outputs of the
communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker)
19 COM16 Format
(19)
8 —
17415 0x4407 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
17416 0x4408 LOW Status of the outputs of the digital
output module 1
118 DO1 Hex 8 —
17416 0x4408 HIGH Status of the outputs of the digital
output module 2
123 DO2 Hex 8 —
17417 0x4409 - Reserved — — — 192 —
17429 0x4415 LOW Property byte (system time of the
circuit breaker)
— COM16 PB 8 —
17429 0x4415 HIGH Property byte (controls the outputs
of the communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker))
— COM16 PB 8 —
17430 0x4416 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
17430 0x4416 HIGH Property byte (status of the outputs
of the digital output module 1)
— DO1 PB 8 —
17431 0x4417 LOW Property byte (status of the outputs
of the digital output module 2)
— DO2 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 187
8.7.4 Register block RB 69 status of the modules
The table below shows the content of register block 69 in which the statuses of the inputs on
the digital input modules and the input on the COM16 module are transmitted. It also
contains the switch positions on the digital input modules and output modules on the
CubicleBUS.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 69: Status of the modules (length
22 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 17 Content of register block 69
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source WL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
17665 0x4501 LOW Status of the inputs of digital
input module 1
110 DI1 Hex 8 —
17665 0x4501 HIGH Status of the inputs of digital
input module 2
114 DI2 Hex 8 —
17666 0x4502 LOW Controls the outputs of the
communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker) and
checkback signals
19 COM16 Format
(19)
8 —
17666 0x4502 HIGH Switch position at the digital input
module 1
111 DI1 Format
(111)
8 —
17667 0x4503 LOW Switch position at the digital input
module 2
115 DI2 Format
(111)
8 —
17667 0x4503 HIGH Switch position at the digital
output module 1
119 DO1 Format
(119)
8 —
17668 0x4504 LOW Switch position at the digital
output module 2
124 DO2 Format
(119)
8 —
17668 0x4504 - Reserved — — — 32 —
17670 0x4506 HIGH Communication module write
protection (WriteEnable)
14 COM16 Format
(14)
1 —
17671 0x4507 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
17671 0x4507 HIGH 6 communication module bits for
the digital configurable output
module
426 COM16 Format
(426)
6 —
17672 0x4508 - Reserved — — — 120 —
17679 0x450F HIGH Property byte (6 Modbus
communication module bits for
the digital configurable output
module)
— COM16 PB 8 —
17680 0x4510 LOW Property byte (status of the
inputs of the digital input module
1)
— DI1 PB 8 —
17680 0x4510 HIGH Property byte (status of the
inputs of the digital input module
2)
— DI2 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
188 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source WL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
17681 0x4511 LOW Property byte (controls the
outputs of the communication
module (e.g. switching the
breaker) and checkback signals)
— COM16 PB 8 —
17681 0x4511 HIGH Property byte (switch position at
the digital input module 1)
— DI1 PB 8 —
17682 0x4512 LOW Property byte (switch position at
the digital input module 2)
— DI2 PB 8 —
17682 0x4512 HIGH Property byte (switch position at
the digital output module 1)
— DO1 PB 8 —
17683 0x4513 LOW Property byte (switch position at
the digital output module 2)
— DO2 PB 8 —
17683 0x4513 - Reserved — — — 32 —
17685 0x4515 HIGH Property byte (communication
module write protection
(WriteEnable))
— COM16 PB 8 —
17686 0x4516 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 189
8.7.5 Register block RB 72 min. and max. measured values
The table below shows the content of register block 72 in which the minimum and maximum
measured values of the currents are transmitted. It also contains the associated time stamps
for these minimum and maximum measured values.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 72: Min./max. measured values of the
currents and the associated time stamps (length 118 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 18 Content of register block 72
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18433 0x4801 - Minimum current in phase 1 384 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18434 0x4802 - Maximum current in phase 1 385 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18435 0x4803 - Minimum current in phase 2 386 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18436 0x4804 - Maximum current in phase 2 387 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18437 0x4805 - Minimum current in phase 3 388 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18438 0x4806 - Maximum current in phase 3 389 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18439 0x4807 - Minimum current in neutral
conductor
390 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18440 0x4808 - Maximum current in neutral
conductor
391 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18441 0x4809 - Minimum current which flows
to ground
392 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18442 0x480A - Maximum current which flows
to ground
393 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18443 0x480B - Minimum mean value over the
three phases
394 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18444 0x480C - Maximum mean value over the
three phases
395 ETU unsigned int 16 0
18445 0x480D - Minimum long-time mean
value for current
244 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18446 0x480E - Maximum long-time mean
value for current
245 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18447 0x480F LOW Minimum peak factor 263 Meter. fct. unsigned ch
ar
8 –1
18447 0x480F HIGH Maximum peak factor 264 Meter. fct. unsigned ch
ar
8 –1
18448 0x4810 LOW Minimum form factor 265 Meter. fct. unsigned ch
ar
8 –1
18448 0x4810 HIGH Maximum of the form factor 266 Meter. fct. unsigned ch
ar
8 –1
18449 0x4811 - TS minimum current in phase
L1
25 COM16 Time 64 —
18453 0x4815 - TS maximum current in phase
L1
26 COM16 Time 64 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
190 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18457 0x4819 - TS minimum current in phase
L2
27 COM16 Time 64 —
18461 0x481D - TS maximum current in phase
L2
28 COM16 Time 64 —
18465 0x4821 - TS minimum current in phase
L3
29 COM16 Time 64 —
18469 0x4825 - TS maximum current in phase
L3
30 COM16 Time 64 —
18473 0x4829 - TS minimum mean value over
the three phases
31 COM16 Time 64 —
18477 0x482D - TS maximum mean value over
the three phases
32 COM16 Time 64 —
18481 0x4831 - TS minimum long-time mean
value for current
55 COM16 Time 64 —
18485 0x4835 - TS maximum long-time mean
value of current
56 COM16 Time 64 —
18489 0x4839 - TS minimum current in neutral
conductor
33 COM16 Time 64 —
18493 0x483D - TS maximum current in neutral
conductor
34 COM16 Time 64 —
18497 0x4841 - TS minimum current that flows
to ground
35 COM16 Time 64 —
18501 0x4845 - TS maximum current that
flows to ground
36 COM16 Time 64 —
18505 0x4849 - TS minimum peak factor 65 COM16 Time 64 —
18509 0x484D - TS maximum peak factor 66 COM16 Time 64 —
18513 0x4851 - TS minimum form factor 67 COM16 Time 64 —
18517 0x4855 - TS maximum form factor 68 COM16 Time 64 —
18521 0x4859 - Reserved — — — 192 —
18533 0x4865 LOW Property byte (minimum
current in phase 1)
— ETU PB 8 —
18533 0x4865 HIGH Property byte (maximum
current in phase 1)
— ETU PB 8 —
18534 0x4866 LOW Property byte (minimum
current in phase 2)
— ETU PB 8 —
18534 0x4866 HIGH Property byte (maximum
current in phase 2)
— ETU PB 8 —
18535 0x4867 LOW Property byte (minimum
current in phase 3)
— ETU PB 8 —
18535 0x4867 HIGH Property byte (maximum
current in phase 3)
— ETU PB 8 —
18536 0x4868 LOW Property byte (minimum
current in neutral conductor)
— ETU PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 191
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18536 0x4868 HIGH Property byte (maximum
current in neutral conductor)
— ETU PB 8 —
18537 0x4869 LOW Property byte (minimum
current that flows to ground)
— ETU PB 8 —
18537 0x4869 HIGH Property byte for byte 18
(maximum current that flows to
ground)
— ETU PB 8 —
18538 0x486A LOW Property byte (minimum mean
value over the three phases)
— ETU PB 8 —
18538 0x486A HIGH Property byte (maximum mean
value over the three phases)
— ETU PB 8 —
18539 0x486B LOW Property byte (minimum long-
time mean value for current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18539 0x486B HIGH Property byte (maximum long-
time mean value for current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18540 0x486C LOW Property byte (minimum peak
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18540 0x486C HIGH Property byte (maximum peak
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18541 0x486D LOW Property byte (minimum form
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18541 0x486D HIGH Property byte (maximum form
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18542 0x486E LOW Property byte (TS minimum
current in phase L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18542 0x486E HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
current in phase L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18543 0x486F LOW Property byte (TS minimum
current in phase L2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18543 0x486F HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
current in phase L2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18544 0x4870 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
current in phase L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18544 0x4870 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
current in phase L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18545 0x4871 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
mean value over the three
phases)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18545 0x4871 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
mean value over the three
phases)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18546 0x4872 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
long-time mean value for
current)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
192 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18546 0x4872 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
long-time mean value for
current)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18547 0x4873 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
current in neutral conductor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18547 0x4873 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
current in neutral conductor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18548 0x4874 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
current that flows to ground)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18548 0x4874 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
current that flows to ground)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18549 0x4875 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
peak factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18549 0x4875 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
peak factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18550 0x4876 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
form factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18550 0x4876 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
form factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 193
8.7.6 Register block RB 73 min. and max. measured values of the voltages
The table below shows the content of register block 73 in which the minimum and maximum
measured values of the voltages are transmitted. It also contains the associated time stamps
for these minimum and maximum measured values.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 73: Min./max. measured values of the
voltages and the associated time stamps (length 87 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 19 Content of register block 73
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18689 0x4901 - Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
205 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18690 0x4902 - Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L1 and L2
206 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18691 0x4903 - Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
207 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18692 0x4904 - Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3
208 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18693 0x4905 - Minimum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
209 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18694 0x4906 - Maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L3 and L1
210 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18695 0x4907 - Minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
211 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18696 0x4908 - Maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
212 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18697 0x4909 - Minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L2
213 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18698 0x490A - Maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L2
214 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18699 0x490B - Minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
215 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18700 0x490C - Maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
216 Meter. fct. unsigned int 16 0
18701 0x490D - TS minimum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L1 and L2
37 COM16 Time 64 —
18705 0x4911 - TS maximum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L1 and L2
38 COM16 Time 64 —
18709 0x4915 - TS minimum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L2 and L3
39 COM16 Time 64 —
18713 0x4919 - TS maximum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L2 and L3
40 COM16 Time 64 —
18717 0x491D - TS minimum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L3 and L1
41 COM16 Time 64 —
18721 0x4921 - TS maximum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L3 and L1
42 COM16 Time 64 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
194 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18725 0x4925 - TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
43 COM16 Time 64 —
18729 0x4929 - TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L1
44 COM16 Time 64 —
18733 0x492D - TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase 2
45 COM16 Time 64 —
18737 0x4931 - TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L2
46 COM16 Time 64 —
18741 0x4935 - TS minimum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
47 COM16 Time 64 —
18745 0x4939 - TS maximum of the neutral point
voltage phase L3
48 COM16 Time 64 —
18749 0x493D - Reserved — — — 240 —
18764 0x494C LOW Property byte (minimum phase-to-
phase voltage between phase L1
and L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18764 0x494C HIGH Property byte (maximum phase-
to-phase voltage between phase
L1 and L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18765 0x494D LOW Property byte (minimum phase-to-
phase voltage between phase L2
and L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18765 0x494D HIGH Property byte (maximum phase-
to-phase voltage between phase
L2 and L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18766 0x494E LOW Property byte (minimum phase-to-
phase voltage between phase L3
and L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18766 0x494E HIGH Property byte for byte 10
(maximum phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L3 and
L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18767 0x494F LOW Property byte (minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18767 0x494F HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18768 0x4950 LOW Property byte (minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18768 0x4950 HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18769 0x4951 LOW Property byte (minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
18769 0x4951 HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 195
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18770 0x4952 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L1 and L2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18770 0x4952 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L1 and L2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18771 0x4953 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L2 and L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18771 0x4953 HIGH Property byte for byte 48 (TS
maximum phase-to-phase voltage
between phase L2 and L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18772 0x4954 LOW Property byte (TS minimum
phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L3 and L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18772 0x4954 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L3 and L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18773 0x4955 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18773 0x4955 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L1)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18774 0x4956 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase 2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18774 0x4956 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L2)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18775 0x4957 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
neutral point voltage phase L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
18775 0x4957 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
neutral point voltage phase L3)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
196 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.7 Register block RB 74 min. and max. measured values of the powers
The table below shows the content of register block 74 in which the minimum and maximum
measured values of the powers are transmitted. It also contains the associated time stamps
for these minimum and maximum measured values.
Table 8- 20 Content of register block 74
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source WL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
18945 0x4A01 - Minimum of the mean value of the
power factor
242 Meter. fct. signed int 16 – 3
18946 0x4A02 - Maximum of the mean value of the
power factor
243 Meter. fct. signed int 16 – 3
18947 0x4A03 - Minimum of the mean value of the
apparent power
246 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
18948 0x4A04 - Maximum of the mean value of the
apparent power
247 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
18949 0x4A05 - Minimum of the mean value of the
active power
250 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
18950 0x4A06 - Maximum of the mean value of the
active power
251 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
18951 0x4A07 - Minimum of the mean value of the
reactive power
248 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
18952 0x4A08 - Maximum of the mean value of the
reactive power
249 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
18953 0x4A09 - TS minimum of the mean value of
the apparent power
57 COM16 Time 64 —
18957 0x4A0D - TS maximum of the mean value of
the apparent power
58 COM16 Time 64 —
18961 0x4A11 - TS minimum of the mean value of
the active power
49 COM16 Time 64 —
18965 0x4A15 - TS maximum of the mean value of
the active power
50 COM16 Time 64 —
18969 0x4A19 - TS minimum of the mean value of
the reactive power
51 COM16 Time 64 —
18973 0x4A1D - TS maximum of the mean value of
the reactive power
52 COM16 Time 64 —
18977 0x4A21 - TS min. of the mean value of the
power factor
53 COM16 Time 64 —
18981 0x4A25 - TS max. of the mean value of the
power factor
54 COM16 Time 64 —
18985 0x4A29 - Reserved — — — 320 —
19005 0x4A3D LOW Property byte (minimum of the
mean value of the power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19005 0x4A3D HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
mean value of the power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 197
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source WL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
19006 0x4A3E LOW Property byte (minimum of the
mean value of the apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19006 0x4A3E HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
mean value of the apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19007 0x4A3F LOW Property byte (minimum of the
mean value of the active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19007 0x4A3F HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
mean value of the active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19008 0x4A40 LOW Property byte (minimum of the
mean value of the reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19008 0x4A40 HIGH Property byte (maximum of the
mean value of the reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19009 0x4A41 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
mean value of the apparent power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19009 0x4A41 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
mean value of the apparent power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19010 0x4A42 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
mean value of the active power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19010 0x4A42 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
mean value of the active power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19011 0x4A43 LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
mean value of the reactive power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19011 0x4A43 HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
mean value of the reactive power)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19012 0x4A44 LOW Property byte (TS min. of the mean
value of the power factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19012 0x4A44 HIGH Property byte (TS max. of the
mean value of the power factor)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
198 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.8 Register block RB 76 min. and max. measured values of the frequency and the
THD
The table below shows the content of register block 76 in which the minimum and maximum
measured values of the frequency and the THD are transmitted. It also contains the
associated time stamps for these minimum and maximum measured values.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 76: Min./max. measured values of the
frequency/THD and the associated time stamps (length 46 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 21 Content of register block 76
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
19457 0x4C01 - Maximum frequency 253 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 – 2
19458 0x4C02 - Minimum frequency 252 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 – 2
19459 0x4C03 LOW Minimum THD of current 255 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
19459 0x4C03 HIGH Maximum THD of current 256 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
19460 0x4C04 LOW Minimum THD of voltage 258 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
19460 0x4C04 HIGH Maximum THD of voltage 259 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
19461 0x4C05 - TS minimum frequency 59 COM16 Time 64 —
19465 0x4C09 - TS maximum frequency 60 COM16 Time 64 —
19469 0x4C0D - TS minimum THD of current 61 COM16 Time 64 —
19473 0x4C11 - TS maximum THD of current 62 COM16 Time 64 —
19477 0x4C15 - TS minimum THD of voltage 63 COM16 Time 64 —
19481 0x4C19 - TS maximum THD of voltage 64 COM16 Time 64 —
19485 0x4C1D - Reserved — — — 192 —
19497 0x4C29 LOW Property byte (maximum of the
frequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19497 0x4C29 HIGH Property byte (minimum of the
frequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19498 0x4C2A LOW Property byte (minimum THD of
current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19498 0x4C2A HIGH Property byte (maximum THD of
current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19499 0x4C2B LOW Property byte (minimum THD of
voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19499 0x4C2B HIGH Property byte (maximum THD of
voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
19500 0x4C2C LOW Property byte (TS minimum of the
frequency)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 199
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
19500 0x4C2C HIGH Property byte (TS maximum of the
frequency)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19501 0x4C2D LOW Property byte (TS minimum THD of
current)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19501 0x4C2D HIGH Property byte (TS maximum THD of
current)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19502 0x4C2E LOW Property byte (TS minimum THD of
voltage)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19502 0x4C2E HIGH Property byte (TS maximum THD of
voltage)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
200 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.9 Register block RB 77 min. and max. measured values of the temperatures
The table below shows register block 77 in which the minimum and maximum measured
values of the temperatures are transmitted. It also contains the associated time stamps for
these minimum and maximum measured values.
Table 8- 22 Content of register block 77
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
19713 0x4D01 LOW Minimum temperature in the control
cabinet
72 COM16 unsigned c
har
8 0
19713 0x4D01 HIGH Maximum temperature in the control
cabinet
73 COM16 unsigned c
har
8 0
19714 0x4D02 LOW Minimum temperature in the circuit
breaker
74 BSS unsigned c
har
8 0
19714 0x4D02 HIGH Maximum temperature in the circuit
breaker
75 BSS unsigned c
har
8 0
19715 0x4D03 - TS minimum temperature in the
control cabinet
76 COM16 Time 64 —
19719 0x4D07 - TS maximum temperature in the
control cabinet
77 COM16 Time 64 —
19723 0x4D0B - TS minimum temperature in the
circuit breaker
78 COM16 Time 64 —
19727 0x4D0F - TS maximum temperature in the
circuit breaker
79 COM16 Time 64 —
19731 0x4D13 - Reserved — — — 112 —
19738 0x4D1A LOW Property byte (minimum
temperature in the control cabinet)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19738 0x4D1A HIGH Property byte (maximum
temperature in the control cabinet)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19739 0x4D1B LOW Property byte (minimum
temperature in the circuit breaker)
— BSS PB 8 —
19739 0x4D1B HIGH Property byte (maximum
temperature in the circuit breaker)
— BSS PB 8 —
19740 0x4D1C LOW Property byte (TS minimum
temperature in the control cabinet)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19740 0x4D1C HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
temperature in the control cabinet)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19741 0x4D1D LOW Property byte (TS minimum
temperature in the circuit breaker)
— COM16 PB 8 —
19741 0x4D1D HIGH Property byte (TS maximum
temperature in the circuit breaker)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 201
8.7.10 Register block RB 91 statistics information
The table below shows the content of register block 91 in which the statistical information on
the SENTRON circuit breakers is transmitted. As with the other register blocks, the property
of each data point is additionally transmitted in the property byte.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 91: Statistical information (length
42 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 23 Content of register block 91
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23297 0x5B01 - Number of switching operations
under load
80 COM16 unsigned int 16 0
23298 0x5B02 - Number of switching operations
caused by trips
81 COM16 unsigned int 16 0
23299 0x5B03 - Switching cycle counter
(for switching cycle on/off)
82 COM16 unsigned int 16 0
23300 0x5B04 - Runtime meter
(when On + current > 0)
83 COM16 unsigned
long
32 0
23302 0x5B06 - Date of the last parameter
change
84 COM16 Time 64 —
23306 0x5B0A - Number of short-circuit trips (SI) 104 ETU unsigned int 16 0
23307 0x5B0B - Number of overload trips (L) 105 ETU unsigned int 16 0
23308 0x5B0C - Number of ground-fault tripping
operations (G)
106 ETU unsigned int 16 0
23309 0x5B0D - Total of deactivated I²t values
L1, L2, L3, N
107 ETU Format
(107)
128 0
23317 0x5B15 LOW Maintenance information about
the main contacts
405 ETU Format
(405)
2 —
23317 0x5B15 - Reserved — — — 56 —
23321 0x5B19 - Modules connected to the
CubicleBUS
88 COM16 Format (88) 32 —
23323 0x5B1B - Reserved — — — 144 —
23332 0x5B24 LOW Property byte (number of
switching operations under load)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23332 0x5B24 HIGH Property byte (number of
switching operations caused by
trips)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23333 0x5B25 LOW Property byte (switching cycle
counter (for On/Off switching
cycle))
— COM16 PB 8 —
23333 0x5B25 HIGH Property byte (runtime meter
(when On + current > 0))
— COM16 PB 8 —
23334 0x5B26 LOW Property byte (date of the last
parameter change)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
202 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23334 0x5B26 HIGH Property byte (number of short-
circuit trips (SI))
— ETU PB 8 —
23335 0x5B27 LOW Property byte (number of
overload trips (L))
— ETU PB 8 —
23335 0x5B27 HIGH Property byte (number of
ground-fault tripping operations
(G))
— ETU PB 8 —
23336 0x5B28 LOW Property byte (total of
deactivated I²t values L1, L2, L3,
N)
— ETU PB 8 —
23336 0x5B28 HIGH Property byte (maintenance
information about the main
contacts)
— ETU PB 8 —
23337 0x5B29 - Reserved — — — 32 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 203
8.7.11 Register block RB 92 diagnostics data
The table below shows the content of register block 92 via which the data for detailed
diagnostics of the SENTRON circuit breakers is transmitted.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 92: Diagnostics data (length 97 registers,
read-only):
Table 8- 24 Content of register block 92
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23553 0x5C01 LOW Device status 1 (identical standard
diagnostics)
— COM16 DP
standard
8 —
23553 0x5C01 HIGH Device status 2 (identical standard
diagnostics)
— COM16 DP
standard
8 —
23554 0x5C02 LOW Device status 3 (identical standard
diagnostics)
— COM16 DP
standard
8 —
23554 0x5C02 HIGH Address of the class 1 master — COM16 unsigned c
har
8 0
23555 0x5C03 - SENTRON identification number
(0x80C0)
— COM16 hex 16 —
23556 0x5C04 LOW Fixed value 0x42 — COM16 hex 8 —
23556 0x5C04 HIGH External diagnostics bit; 1 =
diagnosis;
0 = no diagnosis
— COM16 hex 1 —
23557 0x5C05 - Fixed header;
value 0x05 82 00 00 00
— COM16 hex 40 —
23559 0x5C07 HIGH Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
23560 0x5C08 - Diagnostic messages — COM16 Diagnostic
s
16 —
23562 0x5C0A - Module affected by diagnostics — COM16 Format
(88)
32 —
23563 0x5C0B - Modules connected to the
CubicleBUS
88 COM16 Format
(88)
32 —
23565 0x5C0D - Currently pending alarms 402 ETU Format
(402)
16 —
23566 0x5C0E LOW Last unacknowledged tripping
operation of the trip unit
401 ETU Format
(401)
8 —
23566 0x5C0E HIGH Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
23567 0x5C0F - Tripping operations by metering
function/metering function PLUS
307 Meter.
fct.
Format
(307)
16 —
23568 0x5C10 - Threshold warnings 308 Meter.
fct.
Format
(308)
32 —
23570 0x5C12 - Current at the moment of shutdown 403 ETU unsigned
int
16 1
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
204 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23571 0x5C13 LOW Phase at the moment of shutdown 404 ETU Format
(373)
3 —
23571 0x5C13 HIGH Position of the circuit breaker in the
frame
24 COM16 Format
(24)
4 —
23572 0x5C14 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
16 —
23573 0x5C15 LOW Status of the circuit breaker
(on/off/powered, etc.)
328 BSS Format
(328)
8 —
23573 0x5C15 HIGH Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
23574 0x5C16 - Event log of the last 10 events with
time
16 COM16 Format
(16)
960 —
23634 0x5C52 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
144 —
23643 0x5C5B LOW Property byte (modules connected to
the CubicleBUS)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23643 0x5C5B HIGH Property byte (currently pending
alarms)
— ETU PB 8 —
23644 0x5C5C LOW Property byte (last unacknowledged
tripping operation of the trip unit)
— ETU PB 8 —
23644 0x5C5C HIGH Property byte (tripping operations by
metering function/metering function
PLUS)
— Meter.
fct.
PB 8 —
23645 0x5C5D LOW Property byte (threshold warnings) — Meter.
fct.
PB 8 —
23645 0x5C5D HIGH Property byte (current at the moment
of shutdown)
— ETU PB 8 —
23646 0x5C5E LOW Property byte (phase at the moment
of shutdown)
— ETU PB 8 —
23646 0x5C5E HIGH Property byte (position of the circuit
breaker in the frame)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23647 0x5C5F LOW Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
23647 0x5C5F HIGH Property byte (status of the circuit
breaker (on/off/powered, etc.))
— BSS PB 8 —
23648 0x5C60 LOW Property byte (event log of the last
10 events with time)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23648 0x5C60 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
24 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 205
8.7.12 Register block RB 93 control of the circuit breakers
The table below shows register block RB 93 via which the SENTRON circuit breakers are
switched on, the min./max. buffer deleted, the outputs of the digital output modules forced,
and the 6 available Modbus RTU bits (can be output via the configurable digital output
module) set.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 93: Controlling the circuit breakers (length
14 registers, write-only):
Table 8- 25 Content of register block 93
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23809 0x5D01 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
23811 0x5D03 - Controls the trip unit 406 ETU Format
(406)
16 —
23812 0x5D04 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
16 —
23813 0x5D05 LOW Controls the digital output module 1 121 DO1 Format
(121)
8 —
23813 0x5D05 HIGH Controls the digital output module 2 126 DO2 Format
(121)
8 —
23814 0x5D06 LOW Controls the buffers (e.g. min./max.
values) of the communication
module
18 COM16 Format (18) 8 —
23814 0x5D06 HIGH Controls the outputs of the
communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker)
19 COM16 Format (19) 8 —
23815 0x5D07 LOW Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
23815 0x5D07 HIGH 6 communication module bits for the
digital configurable output module
426 COM16 Format
(426)
6 —
23816 0x5D08 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
40 —
23818 0x5D0A HIGH Property byte (6 communication
module bits for the digital
configurable output module)
— COM16 PB 8 —
23819 0x5D0B LOW Property byte (controls the trip unit) — ETU PB 8 —
23819 0x5D0B HIGH Property byte (reserved) — Meter.
fct.
PB 8 —
23820 0x5D0C LOW Property byte (controls the digital
output module 1)
— DO1 PB 8 —
23820 0x5D0C HIGH Property byte (controls the digital
output module 2)
— DO2 PB 8 —
23821 0x5D0D LOW Property byte (controls the buffers
(e.g. min./max. values) of the
communication module)
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
206 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
23821 0x5D0D HIGH Property byte (controls the outputs
of the communication module (e.g.
switching the breaker))
— COM16 PB 8 —
23822 0x5D0E LOW Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 207
8.7.13 Register block RB 94 current measured values
The table below shows register block 94 in which all current measured values are
transmitted. The additional property bytes provide information on the availability and
correctness of the measured values.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 94; current measured values
(length 99 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 26 Content of register block 94
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24065 0x5E01 LOW Phase unbalance current (as %) 172 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
24065 0x5E01 HIGH Reserved — — unsigned c
har
8 —
24066 0x5E02 - Long-time mean value of 3-phase
current
193 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24067 0x5E03 - Long-time mean value of current L1 194 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24068 0x5E04 - Long-time mean value of current L2 195 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24069 0x5E05 - Long-time mean value of current L3 196 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24070 0x5E06 - Current in phase L1 380 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24071 0x5E07 - Current in phase L2 381 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24072 0x5E08 - Current in phase L3 382 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24073 0x5E09 - Mean current value over the three
phases
383 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24074 0x5E0A - Current in neutral conductor 375 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24075 0x5E0B - Current which flows to ground 376 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
24076 0x5E0C LOW Phase unbalance voltage (in %) 173 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
24076 0x5E0C HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
24077 0x5E0D - Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L1 and L2
197 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24078 0x5E0E - Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L2 and L3
198 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24079 0x5E0F - Phase-to-phase voltage between
phase L3 and L1
199 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24080 0x5E10 - Neutral point voltage phase L1 200 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
208 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24081 0x5E11 - Neutral point voltage phase L2 201 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24082 0x5E12 - Neutral point voltage phase L3 202 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24083 0x5E13 - Mean value of phase-to-phase
voltage
203 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24084 0x5E14 - Mean value of neutral-point star
voltage
204 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24085 0x5E15 - Total apparent power 217 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24086 0x5E16 - Total active power 221 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24087 0x5E17 - Active power in phase L1 222 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24088 0x5E18 - Active power in phase L2 223 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24089 0x5E19 - Active power in phase L3 224 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24090 0x5E1A - Total reactive power 225 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24091 0x5E1B - Long-time mean value of 3-phase
active power
229 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24092 0x5E1C - Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L1
230 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24093 0x5E1D - Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L2
231 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24094 0x5E1E - Long-time mean value of active
power in phase L3
232 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24095 0x5E1F - Long-time mean value of 3-phase
apparent power
233 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24096 0x5E20 - Apparent power in phase L1 218 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24097 0x5E21 - Apparent power in phase L2 219 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24098 0x5E22 - Apparent power in phase L3 220 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24099 0x5E23 - Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L1
234 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24100 0x5E24 - Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L2
235 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24101 0x5E25 - Long-time mean value of apparent
power in phase L3
236 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
24102 0x5E26 - Long-time mean value of 3-phase
reactive power
237 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24103 0x5E27 - Reactive power in phase L1 226 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24104 0x5E28 - Reactive power in phase L2 227 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24105 0x5E29 - Reactive power in phase L3 228 Meter. fct. signed int 16 0
24106 0x5E2A - Active energy in normal direction
[MWh]
238 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 209
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24108 0x5E2C - Active energy in reverse direction
[MWh]
239 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 0
24110 0x5E2E - Reactive energy in normal direction
[MVArh]
240 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 0
24112 0x5E30 - Reactive energy in reverse direction
[MVArh]
241 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 0
24114 0x5E32 - Mean value of the power factor 168 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
24115 0x5E33 - Power factor in phase L1 169 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
24116 0x5E34 - Power factor in phase L2 170 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
24117 0x5E35 - Power factor in phase L3 171 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
24118 0x5E36 - Frequency 262 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 –2
24119 0x5E37 LOW THD of current 254 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
24119 0x5E37 HIGH THD of voltage 257 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
24120 0x5E38 LOW Form factor 261 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 –1
24120 0x5E38 HIGH Peak factor 260 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 –1
24121 0x5E39 - Frequency 3VL 396 — unsigned c
har
16 -2
24122 0x5E3A LOW Temperature in the control cabinet
(measured in the COM16)
71 COM16 unsigned c
har
8 0
24122 0x5E3A HIGH Temperature in circuit breaker
(measured in the BSS)
330 BSS unsigned c
har
8 0
24123 0x5E3B - Active energy in normal direction
[kWh]
433 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 —
24125 0x5E3D - Active energy in reverse direction
[kWh]
434 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 —
24127 0x5E3F - Reactive energy in normal direction
[kVArh]
435 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 —
24129 0x5E41 - Reactive energy in reverse direction
[kVArh]
436 Meter. fct. unsigned
long
32 —
24131 0x5E43 - Reserved — — unsigned c
har
32 —
24133 0x5E45 LOW Property byte (active energy in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24133 0x5E45 HIGH Property byte (active energy in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24134 0x5E46 LOW Property byte (reactive energy in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24134 0x5E46 HIGH Property byte (reactive energy in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
210 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24135 0x5E47 LOW Property byte (phase unbalance
current (as %))
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24135 0x5E47 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of 3-phase current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24136 0x5E48 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of current L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24136 0x5E48 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of current L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24137 0x5E49 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of current L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24137 0x5E49 HIGH Property byte (current in phase L1) — ETU PB 8 —
24138 0x5E4A LOW Property byte (current in phase L2) — ETU PB 8 —
24138 0x5E4A HIGH Property byte (current in phase L3) — ETU PB 8 —
24139 0x5E4B LOW Property byte (mean current value
over the three phases)
— ETU PB 8 —
24139 0x5E4B HIGH Property byte (current in neutral
conductor)
— ETU PB 8 —
24140 0x5E4C LOW Property byte (current which flows to
ground)
— ETU PB 8 —
24140 0x5E4C HIGH Property byte (phase unbalance
voltage (in %))
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24141 0x5E4D LOW Property byte (phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L1 and L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24141 0x5E4D HIGH Property byte (phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L2 and L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24142 0x5E4E LOW Property byte (phase-to-phase
voltage between phase L3 and L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24142 0x5E4E HIGH Property byte (neutral point voltage
phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24143 0x5E4F LOW Property byte (neutral point voltage
phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24143 0x5E4F HIGH Property byte (neutral point voltage
phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24144 0x5E50 LOW Property byte (mean value of phase-
to-phase voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24144 0x5E50 HIGH Property byte (mean value of neutral
point voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24145 0x5E51 LOW Property byte (total apparent power) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24145 0x5E51 HIGH Property byte (total active power) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24146 0x5E52 LOW Property byte (active power in phase
L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24146 0x5E52 HIGH Property byte (active power in phase
L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 211
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24147 0x5E53 LOW Property byte (active power in phase
L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24147 0x5E53 HIGH Property byte (total reactive power) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24148 0x5E54 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of 3-phase active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24148 0x5E54 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of active power in phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24149 0x5E55 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of active power in phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24149 0x5E55 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of active power in phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24150 0x5E56 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of 3-phase apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24150 0x5E56 HIGH Property byte (apparent power in
phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24151 0x5E57 LOW Property byte (apparent power in
phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24151 0x5E57 HIGH Property byte (apparent power in
phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24152 0x5E58 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of apparent power in phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24152 0x5E58 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of apparent power in phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24153 0x5E59 LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
of apparent power in phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24153 0x5E59 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of 3-phase reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24154 0x5E5A LOW Property byte (reactive power in
phase L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24154 0x5E5A HIGH Property byte (reactive power in
phase L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24155 0x5E5B LOW Property byte (reactive power in
phase L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24155 0x5E5B HIGH Property byte (active energy in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24156 0x5E5C LOW Property byte (active energy in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24156 0x5E5C HIGH Property byte (reactive energy in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24157 0x5E5D LOW Property byte (reactive energy in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24157 0x5E5D HIGH Property byte (mean value of the
power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24158 0x5E5E LOW Property byte (power factor in phase
L1)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
212 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24158 0x5E5E HIGH Property byte (power factor in phase
L2)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24159 0x5E5F LOW Property byte (power factor in phase
L3)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
24159 0x5E5F HIGH Property byte (frequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 213
8.7.14 Register block RB 97 Detailed identification
The table below shows register block 97 via which all necessary information for precise
identification of the SENTRON circuit breakers can be retained.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 97: Detailed identification (length
112 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 27 Content of register block 97
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24833 0x6101 - Order number of the trip unit 407 ETU 16 x char 144 —
24842 0x610A - Date of manufacture of trip unit 408 ETU Time 64 —
24846 0x610E - Identification number of trip unit 409 ETU 17 x char 136 —
24854 0x6116 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
24855 0x6117 LOW Ground fault transformer detection
type
410 ETU Format
(410)
2 —
24855 0x6117 HIGH N transformer connected 411 ETU Format
(411)
1 —
24856 0x6118 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
24856 0x6118 HIGH Market in which the trip unit is used 95 ETU Format (95) 2 —
24857 0x6119 - Identification number of circuit
breaker
96 ETU 20 x char 160 —
24867 0x6123 - Reserved — — — 48 —
24870 0x6126 - Test date of switch 98 ETU Time 64 —
24874 0x612A LOW Switching capacity class 99 ETU Format (99) 4 —
24874 0x612A HIGH Size 100 ETU Format
(100)
2 —
24875 0x612B - Rated voltage (LL) of the circuit
breaker
101 ETU unsigned int 16 0
24876 0x612C - Rated current of the external g
transformer
102 ETU unsigned int 16 0
24877 0x612D - Order number of the circuit breaker
(trip unit VL)
103 ETU Format
(103)
160 —
24887 0x6137 - Reserved — — — 144 —
24896 0x6140 - Order number of the trip unit 371 ETU 18 x char 144 —
24905 0x6149 LOW Number of poles of circuit breaker 108 ETU Format
(108)
3 —
24905 0x6149 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
24906 0x614A - Rating plug 377 ETU unsigned int 16 0
24907 0x614B - Circuit breaker frame 378 ETU unsigned int 16 0
24908 0x614C - Reserved — — — 400 —
24933 0x6165 LOW Property byte (order number of the
trip unit)
— ETU PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
214 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
24933 0x6165 HIGH Property byte (date of manufacture
of trip unit)
— ETU PB 8 —
24934 0x6166 LOW Property byte (identification number
of trip unit)
— ETU PB 8 —
24934 0x6166 HIGH Property byte (ground fault
transformer detection method)
— ETU PB 8 —
24935 0x6167 LOW Property byte (N transformer
connected)
— ETU PB 8 —
24935 0x6167 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
24936 0x6168 LOW Property byte (market in which the
trip unit is used)
— ETU PB 8 —
24936 0x6168 HIGH Property byte (identification number
of circuit breaker)
— ETU PB 8 —
24937 0x6169 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
24937 0x6169 HIGH Property byte (test date for switch) — ETU PB 8 —
24938 0x616A LOW Property byte (switching capacity
class)
— ETU PB 8 —
24938 0x616A HIGH Property byte (size) — ETU PB 8 —
24939 0x616B LOW Property byte (rated voltage (LL) of
the circuit breaker)
— ETU PB 8 —
24939 0x616B HIGH Property byte (rated current of the
external g transformer)
— ETU PB 8 —
24940 0x616C LOW Property byte (order number of the
circuit breaker (trip unit VL))
— ETU PB 8 —
24940 0x616C HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
24941 0x616D LOW Property byte (order number of the
trip unit)
— ETU PB 8 —
24941 0x616D HIGH Property byte (number of poles of
circuit breaker)
— ETU PB 8 —
24942 0x616E LOW Property byte (rating plug) — ETU PB 8 —
24942 0x616E HIGH Property byte (circuit breaker frame) — ETU PB 8 —
24943 0x616F LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
24943 0x616F Reserved — — PB 16 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 215
8.7.15 Register block RB 100 Identification in overview
The table below shows register block 100 that contains the identification of the relevant
switch (test data, manufacturer, device name or family, device class, etc.).
The table below contains the register blocks RB 100: Identification overview (length
50 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 28 Content of register block 100
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
25601 0x6401 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
25603 0x6403 - Test date of switch — ETU Time 64 —
25607 0x6407 - Manufacturer (SIEMENS or SE&A) — COM16 20 x char 160 —
25617 0x6411 - Device name (SENTRON WL or
SENTRON VL)
— COM16 24 x char 192 —
25629 0x641D LOW Device family (fixed value 0x03) — COM16 hex 8 —
25629 0x641D HIGH Device bus family (fixed value
0x01)
— COM16 hex 8 —
25630 0x641E LOW Device class
(1 = air circuit breaker; 2 = compact
circuit breaker)
— COM16 hex 8 —
25630 0x641E HIGH System (fixed value 0x06) — COM16 hex 8 —
25631 0x641F LOW Function group
(Bit .0 for COM16; bit .4 for
COM11)
— COM16 hex 8 —
25631 0x641F HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
25632 0x6420 - Abbreviated designation (PCB or
MCCB)
— COM16 16 x char 128 —
25640 0x6428 - HW version — COM16 4 x char 32 —
25642 0x642A - Modbus identification number
(0x00 00 80 C0)
— COM16 hex 32 —
25644 0x642C - Reserved — — — 16 —
25645 0x642D - Service number (lower part of
switch identification number)
— COM16 8 x char 64 —
25649 0x6431 - Firmware version of Modbus
module
— COM16 4 x char 32 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
216 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.16 Register block RB 128 parameters of the metering function and extended
protection function
The table below shows register block 128 via which the parameters of the metering function
and the extended protection function can be read out but also set. It also contains the
assignments of the configurable digital output module.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 128: Parameters of the metering function
and the extended protection function (length 52 registers, read/write):
Table 8- 29 Content of register block 128
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
32769 0x8001 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
32771 0x8003 LOW The voltage transformer can be star
or delta-connected on the primary
side
162 Meter. fct. Format
(162)
1 —
32771 0x8003 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
32772 0x8004 - Rated voltage of the system (on the
primary side)
164 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32773 0x8005 LOW Secondary voltage of transformer 165 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32773 0x8005 HIGH Length of period for calculating
long-time mean value
166 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32774 0x8006 LOW Number of sub-periods for
calculating long-time mean value
167 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32774 0x8006 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
32775 0x8007 - Lower limit of power transmission 372 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
32776 0x8008 - Active power in normal direction 141 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32777 0x8009 - Active power in reverse direction 143 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32778 0x800A LOW Delay time for active power in
normal direction
142 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32778 0x800A HIGH Delay time for active power in
reverse direction
144 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32779 0x800B LOW Normal direction of incoming supply 145 Meter. fct. Format
(145)
1 —
32779 0x800B HIGH Direction of rotation of phase 146 Meter. fct. Format
(146)
1 —
32780 0x800C - Underfrequency 147 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32781 0x800D LOW Delay time for overfrequency 150 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32781 0x800D HIGH Delay time for underfrequency 148 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 217
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
32782 0x800E - Overfrequency 149 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32783 0x800F LOW THD of current 158 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32783 0x800F HIGH Delay time of THD of current 159 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32784 0x8010 LOW THD of voltage 160 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32784 0x8010 HIGH Delay time of THD of voltage 161 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32785 0x8011 LOW Voltage unbalance 151 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32785 0x8011 HIGH Delay time for voltage unbalance 152 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32786 0x8012 - Undervoltage 153 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32787 0x8013 - Overvoltage 155 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
32788 0x8014 LOW Delay time for undervoltage 154 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32788 0x8014 HIGH Delay time for overvoltage 156 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32789 0x8015 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
32789 0x8015 HIGH Current unbalance 139 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32790 0x8016 LOW Delay time for current unbalance 140 Meter. fct. unsigned c
har
8 0
32790 0x8016 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
32791 0x8017 - Reserved — — — 16 0
32792 0x8018 - Assignment of config. dig. output
module
129 conf. DO Format
(129)
168 —
32802 0x8022 - Reserved — — — 24 —
32804 0x8024 LOW Property byte (voltage transformer
can be star or delta-connected on
the primary side)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32804 0x8024 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
32805 0x8025 LOW Property byte (rated voltage of the
system (on the primary side))
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32805 0x8025 HIGH Property byte (secondary voltage of
transformer)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32806 0x8026 LOW Property byte (length of period for
calculating long-time mean value)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32806 0x8026 HIGH Property byte (number of sub-
periods for calculating long-time
mean value)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
218 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
32807 0x8027 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
32807 0x8027 HIGH Property byte 2 (lower limit of power
transmission)
— ETU PB 8 —
32808 0x8028 LOW Property byte (active power in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32808 0x8028 HIGH Property byte (active power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32809 0x8029 LOW Property byte (delay time for active
power in normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32809 0x8029 HIGH Property byte (delay time for active
power in reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32810 0x802A LOW Property byte (normal direction of
incoming supply)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32810 0x802A HIGH Property byte (direction of rotation
of phase)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32811 0x802B LOW Property byte (underfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32811 0x802B HIGH Property byte (delay time for
overfrequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32812 0x802C LOW Property byte (delay time for
underfrequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32812 0x802C HIGH Property byte (overfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32813 0x802D LOW Property byte (THD of current) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32813 0x802D HIGH Property byte (delay time of THD of
current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32814 0x802E LOW Property byte (THD of voltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32814 0x802E HIGH Property byte (delay time of THD of
voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32815 0x802F LOW Property byte (voltage unbalance) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32815 0x802F HIGH Property byte (delay time for
voltage unbalance)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32816 0x8030 LOW Property byte (undervoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32816 0x8030 HIGH Property byte (overvoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32817 0x8031 LOW Property byte (delay time for
undervoltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32817 0x8031 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
overvoltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32818 0x8032 LOW Property byte (reserved) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32818 0x8032 HIGH Property byte (current unbalance) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32819 0x8033 LOW Property byte (delay time for current
unbalance)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
32819 0x8033 HIGH Reserved — — PB 8 —
32820 0x8034 LOW Property byte (assignment of
config. dig. output module)
— conf. DO PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 219
8.7.17 Register block RB 129 parameters of the protection function and settings for
load shedding and load pick up
The table below shows RB 129 that contains the parameters (overload protection, time-lag
class, short-circuit protection, thermal memory, phase loss sensitivity, etc.) of the protection
function, and the settings for load shedding and load pick up.
The table below shows RB 129 that contains the parameters of the protection function, and
the settings for load shedding and load pick up:
Table 8- 30 Content of register block 129
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33025 0x8101 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
33027 0x8103 - Overload parameter IR parameter set
A (PS A)
333 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33028 0x8104 - Overload protection neutral conductor
IN PS A (WL)
334 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33029 0x8105 - Time-lag class tR PS A 335 ETU unsigned
int
16 –1
33030 0x8106 - Short-circuit protection instantaneous
Ii PS A
336 ETU unsigned
int
16 1
33031 0x8107 - Short-circuit protection delayed Isd
PS A
337 ETU unsigned
int
16 1
33032 0x8108 - Delay time for short-circuit protection
tsd PS A
338 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33033 0x8109 - Ground-fault protection Ig PS A 339 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33034 0x810A - Delay time for ground fault tg PS A 340 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33035 0x810B - Ground fault alarm Ig2 PS A 341 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33036 0x810C - Delay time for ground fault alarm tg2
PS A
342 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33037 0x810D LOW I2t characteristic for delayed short-
circuit protection PS A
343 ETU Format
(343)
1 —
33037 0x810D HIGH I2t characteristic for ground-fault
protection PS A
344 ETU Format
(344)
1 —
33038 0x810E LOW I4t characteristic for overload
protection PS A
345 ETU Format
(345)
1 —
33038 0x810E HIGH Thermal memory PS A 346 ETU Format
(346)
1 —
33039 0x810F LOW Phase loss sensitivity PS A 347 ETU Format
(347)
1 —
33039 0x810F HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33040 0x8110 - Cooling time constant PS A 348 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
220 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33041 0x8111 - Overload parameter IR parameter set
B (PS B)
349 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33042 0x8112 - Overload protection neutral conductor
IN PS B
350 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33043 0x8113 - Time-lag class tR PS B 351 ETU unsigned
int
16 –1
33044 0x8114 - Short-circuit protection instantaneous
Ii PS B
352 ETU unsigned
int
16 1
33045 0x8115 - Short-circuit protection delayed Isd
PS B
353 ETU unsigned
int
16 1
33046 0x8116 - Delay time for short-circuit protection
tsd PS B
354 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33047 0x8117 - Ground-fault protection Ig PS B 355 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33048 0x8118 - Delay time for ground fault tg PS B 356 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33049 0x8119 - Ground-fault protection alarm Ig2
PS B
357 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33050 0x811A - Delay time for ground fault alarm tg2
PS B
358 ETU unsigned
int
16 –3
33051 0x811B LOW I2t curve for delayed short-circuit
protection PS B
359 ETU Format
(343)
1 —
33051 0x811B HIGH I2t curve for ground-fault protection
PS B
360 ETU Format
(344)
1 —
33052 0x811C LOW I4t characteristic for overload
protection PS B
361 ETU Format
(345)
1 —
33052 0x811C HIGH Thermal memory PS B 362 ETU Format
(346)
1 —
33053 0x811D LOW Phase loss sensitivity PS B 363 ETU Format
(347)
1 —
33053 0x811D HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33054 0x811E - Cooling time constant PS B 364 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33055 0x811F - Load shedding 367 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33056 0x8120 - Load pick up 368 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33057 0x8121 LOW Delay time for load shedding / pick up 366 ETU unsigned c
har
8 0
33057 0x8121 HIGH Active parameter set 370 ETU Format
(370)
1 —
33058 0x8122 - Reserved — — — 16 0
33059 0x8123 LOW Reserved — — — 8 0
33059 0x8123 HIGH Ground fault transformer detection
type
410 ETU Format
(410)
2 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 221
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33060 0x8124 - Rated current of the external g
transformer
102 ETU unsigned
int
16 0
33061 0x8125 - Reserved 331 — — 208 —
33074 0x8132 LOW Property byte (rated current of the
external g transformer)
333 ETU PB 8 —
33074 0x8132 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33075 0x8133 LOW Property byte (overload parameter IR
parameter set A (PS A))
335 ETU PB 8 —
33075 0x8133 HIGH Property byte (overload protection
neutral conductor IN PS A (WL))
336 ETU PB 8 —
33076 0x8134 LOW Property byte
(time-lag class tR PS A)
337 ETU PB 8 —
33076 0x8134 HIGH Property byte (short-circuit protection
instantaneous Ii PS A)
338 ETU PB 8 —
33077 0x8135 LOW Property byte (short-circuit protection
delayed Isd PS A)
339 ETU PB 8 —
33077 0x8135 HIGH Property byte (delay time for short-
circuit protection tsd PS A)
340 ETU PB 8 —
33078 0x8136 LOW Property byte
(ground-fault protection Ig PS A)
341 ETU PB 8 —
33078 0x8136 HIGH Property byte (delay time for ground
fault tg PS A)
342 ETU PB 8 —
33079 0x8137 LOW Property byte
(ground-fault alarm Ig2 PS A)
343 ETU PB 8 —
33079 0x8137 HIGH Property byte (delay time for ground
fault alarm tg2 PS A)
344 ETU PB 8 —
33080 0x8138 LOW Property byte (I2t characteristic for
delayed short-circuit protection PS A)
345 ETU PB 8 —
33080 0x8138 HIGH Property byte (I2t characteristic for
ground-fault protection PS A)
346 ETU PB 8 —
33081 0x8139 LOW Property byte (I4t characteristic for
overload protection PS A)
347 ETU PB 8 —
33081 0x8139 HIGH Property byte (thermal memory
PS A)
348 ETU PB 8 —
33082 0x813A LOW Property byte (phase loss sensitivity
PS A)
349 ETU PB 8 —
33082 0x813A HIGH Property byte (cooling time constant
PS A)
350 ETU PB 8 —
33083 0x813B LOW Property byte (overload parameter IR
parameter set B (PS B))
351 ETU PB 8 —
33083 0x813B HIGH Property byte (overload protection
neutral conductor IN PS B)
352 ETU PB 8 —
33084 0x813C LOW Property byte (time-lag class tR PS
B)
353 ETU PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
222 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33084 0x813C HIGH Property byte (short-circuit protection
instantaneous Ii PS B)
354 ETU PB 8 —
33085 0x813D LOW Property byte (short-circuit protection
delayed Isd PS B)
355 ETU PB 8 —
33085 0x813D HIGH Property byte (delay time for short-
circuit protection tsd PS B)
356 ETU PB 8 —
33086 0x813E LOW Property byte (ground-fault protection
Ig PS B)
357 ETU PB 8 —
33086 0x813E HIGH Property byte (delay time for ground
fault tg PS B)
358 ETU PB 8 —
33087 0x813F LOW Property byte (ground-fault alarm Ig2
PS B)
359 ETU PB 8 —
33087 0x813F HIGH Property byte (delay time for ground
fault alarm tg2 PS B)
360 ETU PB 8 —
33088 0x8140 LOW Property byte (I2t curve for delayed
short-circuit protection PS B)
361 ETU PB 8 —
33088 0x8140 HIGH Property byte (I2t characteristic for
ground-fault protection PS B)
362 ETU PB 8 —
33089 0x8141 LOW Property byte (I4t characteristic for
overload protection PS B)
363 ETU PB 8 —
33089 0x8141 HIGH Property byte (thermal memory PS B) 364 ETU PB 8 —
33090 0x8142 LOW Property byte (phase loss sensitivity
PS B)
367 ETU PB 8 —
33090 0x8142 HIGH Property byte (cooling time constant
PS B)
368 ETU PB 8 —
33091 0x8143 LOW Property byte (load shedding) 366 ETU PB 8 —
33091 0x8143 HIGH Property byte (load pick up) 370 ETU PB 8 —
33092 0x8144 LOW Property byte (delay time for load
shedding/pick up)
365 ETU PB 8 —
33092 0x8144 HIGH Property byte (active parameter set) 421 — PB 8 —
33093 0x8145 — Reserved — — — 16 —
33094 0x8146 LOW Property byte (time lag class
(SENTRON VL LCD ETU40M only))
331 — PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 223
8.7.18 Register block RB 131 switching the parameters for the extended protection
function and the threshold values on and off
The table below shows RB 131 via whose property bytes the parameters of the protection
function, the extended protection function, and the threshold parameters can be switched on
and off.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 131: Parameters for switching the
parameters for the extended protection function and the threshold values on and off (length
35 registers, read/write):
Table 8- 31 Content of register block 131
Register
Address
dec Hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33537 0x8301 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
33539 0x8303 LOW Property byte (overload parameter
IR parameter set A (PS A))
— ETU PB 8 —
33539 0x8303 HIGH Property byte (overload protection
neutral conductor IN PS A (WL))
— ETU PB 8 —
33540 0x8304 LOW Property byte (short-circuit
protection instantaneous Ii PS A)
— ETU PB 8 —
33540 0x8304 HIGH Property byte (short-circuit
protection delayed Isd PS A)
— ETU PB 8 —
33541 0x8305 LOW Property byte (ground-fault
protection Ig PS A)
— ETU PB 8 —
33541 0x8305 HIGH Property byte (ground-fault alarm Ig2
PS A)
— ETU PB 8 —
33542 0x8306 LOW Property byte (overload parameter
IR parameter set B (PS B))
— ETU PB 8 —
33542 0x8306 HIGH Property byte (overload protection
neutral conductor IN PS B)
— ETU PB 8 —
33543 0x8307 LOW Property byte (short-circuit
protection instantaneous Ii PS B)
— ETU PB 8 —
33543 0x8307 HIGH Property byte (short-circuit
protection delayed Isd PS B)
— ETU PB 8 —
33544 0x8308 LOW Property byte (ground-fault
protection Ig PS B)
— ETU PB 8 —
33544 0x8308 HIGH Property byte (ground-fault alarm Ig2
PS B)
— ETU PB 8 —
33545 0x8309 LOW Property byte (active power in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33545 0x8309 HIGH Property byte (active power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33546 0x830A LOW Property byte (direction of rotation
of phase)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33546 0x830A HIGH Property byte (underfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33547 0x830B LOW Property byte (overfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
224 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec Hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33547 0x830B HIGH Property byte (THD of current) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33548 0x830C LOW Property byte (THD of current) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33548 0x830C HIGH Property byte (voltage unbalance) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33549 0x830D LOW Property byte (undervoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33549 0x830D HIGH Property byte (overvoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33550 0x830E LOW Property byte (current unbalance) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33550 0x830E HIGH Property byte (active power in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33551 0x830F LOW Property byte (active power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33551 0x830F HIGH Property byte (capacitive power
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33552 0x8310 LOW Property byte (inductive power
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33552 0x8310 HIGH Property byte (overfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33553 0x8311 LOW Property byte (underfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33553 0x8311 HIGH Property byte (current THD) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33554 0x8312 LOW Property byte (voltage THD) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33554 0x8312 HIGH Property byte (peak factor) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33555 0x8313 LOW Property byte (form factor) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33555 0x8313 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean
value for active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33556 0x8314 LOW Property byte (long-time mean
value for apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33556 0x8314 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean
value for reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33557 0x8315 LOW Property byte (reactive power in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33557 0x8315 HIGH Property byte (reactive power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33558 0x8316 LOW Property byte (apparent power) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33558 0x8316 HIGH Property byte (overcurrent) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33559 0x8317 LOW Property byte (current that flows to
ground)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33559 0x8317 HIGH Property byte (overcurrent in neutral
conductor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33560 0x8318 LOW Property byte (long-time mean
value of current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33560 0x8318 HIGH Property byte (phase unbalance
current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33561 0x8319 LOW Property byte (undervoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33561 0x8319 HIGH Property byte (phase unbalance
voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 225
Register
Address
dec Hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33562 0x831A LOW Property byte (overvoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33562 0x831A HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33563 0x831B LOW Property byte (thermal memory
PS A)
— ETU PB 8 —
33563 0x831B HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33564 0x831C LOW Property byte (N transformer
connected)
— ETU PB 8 —
33564 0x8301 - Reserved — — — 120 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
226 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.19 Register block RB 130 parameters for the threshold values
The table below shows RB 130 via which the parameters for generating threshold warnings
can be read out and modified.
The table contains the register blocks RB 130: Parameters for the threshold values (length
74 registers, read/write) Part 1:
Table 8- 32 Content of register block 130
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33281 0x8201 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
33283 0x8203 - Active power in normal direction 283 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33284 0x8204 - Active power in reverse direction 285 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33285 0x8205 - Power factor, capacitive 287 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
33286 0x8206 - Power factor, inductive 289 Meter. fct. signed int 16 –3
33287 0x8207 LOW Delay time for active power in normal
direction
284 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33287 0x8207 HIGH Delay time for active power in
reverse direction
286 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33288 0x8208 LOW Delay time for power factor,
capacitive
288 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33288 0x8208 HIGH Delay time for power factor, inductive 290 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33289 0x8209 LOW Overfrequency 303 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33289 0x8209 HIGH Delay time for overfrequency 304 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33290 0x820A LOW Underfrequency 305 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33290 0x820A HIGH Delay time for underfrequency 306 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33291 0x820B LOW THD current 319 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33291 0x820B HIGH Delay time for THD current 320 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33292 0x820C LOW THD voltage 321 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33292 0x820C HIGH Delay time for THD voltage 322 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33293 0x820D - Peak factor 323 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 –2
33294 0x820E - Form factor 325 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 –2
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 227
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33295 0x820F LOW Delay time for peak factor 324 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33295 0x820F HIGH Delay time for the form factor 326 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33296 0x8210 - Long-time mean value of active
power
291 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33297 0x8211 - Long-time mean value of apparent
power
293 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33298 0x8212 LOW Delay time for long-time mean value
of active power
292 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33298 0x8212 HIGH Delay time for long-time mean value
of apparent power
294 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33299 0x8213 - Long-time mean value of reactive
power
295 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33300 0x8214 - Reactive power in normal direction 297 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33301 0x8215 LOW Delay time for long-time mean value
of reactive power
296 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33301 0x8215 HIGH Delay time for reactive power in
normal direction
298 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33302 0x8216 - Reactive power in reverse direction 299 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33303 0x8217 - Apparent power 301 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33304 0x8218 LOW Delay time for reactive power in
reverse direction
300 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33304 0x8218 HIGH Delay time for apparent power 302 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33305 0x8219 - Overcurrent 267 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33306 0x821A - Current that flows to ground 269 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33307 0x821B - Overcurrent in neutral conductor 271 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33308 0x821C - Long-time mean value of current 275 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33309 0x821D LOW Delay time for overcurrent 268 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33309 0x821D HIGH Delay time of current that flows to
ground
270 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33310 0x821E LOW Delay time for overcurrent in neutral
conductor
272 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33310 0x821E HIGH Phase unbalance current 273 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
228 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33311 0x821F LOW Delay time for current phase
unbalance
274 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33311 0x821F HIGH Delay time for long-time mean value
of current
276 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33312 0x8220 - Undervoltage 277 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33313 0x8221 LOW Delay time for undervoltage 278 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33313 0x8221 HIGH Phase unbalance voltage 279 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33314 0x8222 LOW Delay time for voltage phase
unbalance
280 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33314 0x8222 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
33315 0x8223 - Overvoltage 281 Meter. fct. unsigned
int
16 0
33316 0x8224 LOW Delay time for overvoltage 282 Meter. fct. unsigned
char
8 0
33316 0x8224 - Reserved — — — 232 —
33331 0x8233 LOW Property byte (active power in normal
direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33331 0x8233 HIGH Property byte (active power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33332 0x8234 LOW Property byte (capacitive power
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33332 0x8234 HIGH Property byte (inductive power factor) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33333 0x8235 LOW Property byte (delay time for active
power in normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33333 0x8235 HIGH Property byte (delay time for active
power in reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33334 0x8236 LOW Property byte (delay time for
capacitive power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33334 0x8236 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
inductive power factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33335 0x8237 LOW Property byte (overfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33335 0x8237 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
overfrequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33336 0x8238 LOW Property byte (underfrequency) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33336 0x8238 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
underfrequency)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33337 0x8239 LOW Property byte (current THD) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33337 0x8239 HIGH Property byte (delay time for current
THD)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33338 0x823A LOW Property byte (voltage THD) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 229
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33338 0x823A HIGH Property byte (delay time for voltage
THD)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33339 0x823B LOW Property byte (peak factor) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33339 0x823B HIGH Property byte (form factor) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33340 0x823C LOW Property byte (delay time for peak
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33340 0x823C HIGH Property byte (delay time for form
factor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33341 0x823D LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
for active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33341 0x823D HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
for apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33342 0x823E LOW Property byte (delay time for long-
time mean value of active power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33342 0x823E HIGH Property byte (delay time for long-
time mean value of apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33343 0x823F LOW Property byte (long-time mean value
for reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33343 0x823F HIGH Property byte (reactive power in
normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33344 0x8240 LOW Property byte (delay time for long-
time mean value of reactive power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33344 0x8240 HIGH Property byte (delay time for reactive
power in normal direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33345 0x8241 LOW Property byte (reactive power in
reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33345 0x8241 HIGH Property byte (apparent power) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33346 0x8242 LOW Property byte (delay time for reactive
power in reverse direction)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33346 0x8242 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
apparent power)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33347 0x8243 LOW Property byte (overcurrent) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33347 0x8243 HIGH Property byte (current that flows to
ground)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33348 0x8244 LOW Property byte (overcurrent in neutral
conductor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33348 0x8244 HIGH Property byte (long-time mean value
of current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33349 0x8245 LOW Property byte (delay time for
overcurrent)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33349 0x8245 HIGH Property byte (delay time of current
that flows to ground)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33350 0x8246 LOW Property byte (delay time for
overcurrent in neutral conductor)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
230 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
33350 0x8246 HIGH Property byte (phase unbalance
current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33351 0x8247 LOW Property byte (delay time for phase
unbalance current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33351 0x8247 HIGH Property byte (delay time for long-
time mean value of current)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33352 0x8248 LOW Property byte (undervoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33352 0x8248 HIGH Property byte (delay time for
undervoltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33353 0x8249 LOW Property byte (phase unbalance
voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33353 0x8249 HIGH Property byte (delay time for phase
unbalance voltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33354 0x824A LOW Property byte (overvoltage) — Meter. fct. PB 8 —
33354 0x824A HIGH Property byte (delay time for
overvoltage)
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 231
8.7.20 Register block RB 160 parameters for communication
The following table shows register block 160, in which the parameters for communication are
stored. These parameters can be read and also set via this data set.
The table contains the register blocks RB 160: Parameters for communication (length
39 registers, read/write):
Table 8- 33 Content of register block 160
Register
Address
dec hex
High/Lo
w
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
40961 0xA001 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
40963 0xA003 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
40963 0xA003 HIGH Modbus address 5 COM16 unsigned c
har
8 0
40964 0xA004 LOW Basic type of Modbus data transfer 6 COM16 Hex 2 —
40964 0xA004 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
40965 0xA005 - Data in the cyclic profile of Modbus 7 COM16 Format (7) 224 —
40979 0xA013 - Reserved — — — 48 —
40982 0xA016 - IP address of the BDA PLUS 10 BDA PLU
S
Format (10) 40 —
40985 0xA019 LOW Modbus transmission rate (baud
rate)
427 COM16 Format
(427)
8 —
40985 0xA019 HIGH Parity 428 COM16 Format
(428)
8 —
40986 0xA01A - Reserved — — — 144 —
40995 0xA023 LOW Property byte (parity) 428 COM16 PB 8 —
40995 0xA023 HIGH Property byte (Modbus
transmission rate (baud rate))
427 COM16 PB 8 —
40996 0xA024 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
40996 0xA024 HIGH Property byte (Modbus address) 5 COM16 PB 8 —
40997 0xA025 LOW Property byte (basic type of
Modbus data transfer)
6 COM16 PB 8 —
40997 0xA025 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
40998 0xA026 LOW Property byte (data in the cyclic
profile of Modbus)
7 COM16 PB 8 —
40998 0xA026 HIGH Reserved — — — 8 —
40999 0xA027 LOW Property byte (IP address of the
BDA PLUS)
— BDA PLU
S
PB 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
232 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.7.21 Register block RB 162 device configuration
The table below shows register block 162 that contains the device configuration. The circuit
breaker currently connected can be read out via this data set.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 162: Device configuration (length
38 registers, read-only):
Table 8- 34 Content of register block 162
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
41473 0xA201 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
41475 0xA203 - ID number of the COM16 91 COM16 16 x char 128 —
41483 0xA20B - Order number of the circuit breaker
(on the SENTRON VL, this is the
order number of the trip unit)
103 ETU Format
(103)
160 —
41493 0xA215 LOW Type (metering function, metering
function PLUS)
138 Meter. fct. Format
(138)
8 —
41493 0xA215 HIGH Type of trip unit 412 ETU Format
(412)
5 —
41494 0xA216 - Reserved — — — 224 —
41508 0xA224 LOW Property byte (ID number of the
COM16)
— COM16 PB 8 —
41508 0xA224 HIGH Property byte (order number of the
circuit breaker (on the
SENTRON VL, this is the order
number of the trip unit))
— ETU PB 8 —
41509 0xA225 LOW Property byte (type (metering
function, metering function PLUS))
— Meter. fct. PB 8 —
41509 0xA225 HIGH Property byte (type of trip unit) — ETU PB 8 —
41510 0xA226 LOW Reserved — — — 8 —
Data library
8.7 Register blocks for SENTRON WL
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 233
8.7.22 Register block RB 165 identification comment
The table below shows register block 165 in which user-specific texts such as comments,
plant identifier, date and author can be stored in the SENTRON circuit breaker.
The table below contains the register blocks RB 165: Identification comment (length
97 registers, read/write):
Table 8- 35 Content of register block 165
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Source
WL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
42241 0xA501 - Header; value 0x00 00 00 00 — COM16 — 32 —
42243 0xA503 - User text (freely editable) 20 COM16 64 x char 512 —
42275 0xA523 - Plant identifier (freely editable) 21 COM16 64 x char 512 —
42307 0xA543 - Date (freely editable) 22 COM16 Time 64 —
42311 0xA547 - Author (freely editable) 23 COM16 30 x char 240 —
42326 0xA556 - Reserved — — — 160 —
42336 0xA560 LOW Property byte (user text (freely
editable))
— COM16 PB 8 —
42336 0xA560 HIGH Property byte (plant identifier (freely
editable))
— COM16 PB 8 —
42337 0xA561 LOW Property byte (date (freely editable)) — COM16 PB 8 —
42337 0xA561 HIGH Property byte (author (freely
editable))
— COM16 PB 8 —
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
234 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
8.8.1 Cyclic data
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source VL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5001 0x1389 Switch status (status
byte)
— COM21 Status
byte
32 —
5002 0x138A Current in phase L1 380 Meter-
CurrentL1
ETU unsigned
int
512 0
5003 0x138B Current in phase L2 381 Meter-
CurrentL2
ETU unsigned
int
512 0
5004 0x138C Current in phase L3 382 Meter-
CurrentL3
ETU unsigned
int
64 0
5005 0x138D Current of phase
with maximum load
374 Meter-
Current-
MaxAll
ETU unsigned
int
240 0
5006 0x138E Current in neutral
conductor
375 Meter-
Current-
Neutral
ETU unsigned
int
160 0
5007 0x138F Current which flows
to ground
376 Meter-
Current-
Ground
ETU unsigned
int
8 0
5008 0x1390 Currently pending
alarms
402 Diag-
Warning-
TripUnit
ETU Format
(402)
8 —
5009 0x1391 Current at the
moment of
shutdown
403 Diag-
Interrupt-
FaultCurrent
ETU unsigned
int
8 0(VL)/1
5010 0x1392 LOW Phase at the
moment of
shutdown
404 Diag-
Interrupt-
FaultPhase
ETU Format
(373)
8 —
5010 0x1392 Reserved 12 StatusTripUn
it
ETU unsigned
char
—
5011 0x1393 LOW Reserved 418 StatusZSIMo
dule
ETU Format
(418)
—
5011 0x1393 HIGH Reserved — — — Format
(307)
—
5012 0x1394 LOW Reserved — — — unsigned
char
—
5012 0x1394 HIGH Reserved — — — unsigned
char
—
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 235
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source VL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5013 0x1395 LOW Status of the circuit
breaker
(on/off/powered,
etc.)
328 Status-
CBreaker
COM21 Format
(328)
—
5013 0x1395 HIGH Last
unacknowledged
tripping operation of
the trip unit
401 DiagTrips-
TripUnit
ETU Format
(401)
—
5014 0x1396 LOW Shows the phase
with maximum load
373 Meter-
PhaseMaxC
urrent
ETU Format
(373)
—
5014 0x1396 HIGH Position of the circuit
breaker in the frame
24 Status-
Position-
CBreaker
COM21 Format
(24)
—
5015 0x1397 Mean current value
over the three
phases
383 Meter-
Current-
AVGAll
ETU unsigned
int
0
5016 0x1398 Long-time mean
value of 3-phase
current
193 Meter-
Current-
DemandAVG
ETU unsigned
int
0
5017 0x1399 LOW Phase unbalance
current (as %)
172 Meter-
Current-
Unbal
ETU unsigned
char
0
5017 0x1399 HIGH Maximum phase
unbalance current in
%
437 Meter-
Current-
UnbalMax
ETU unsigned
char
0
5018 0x139A Maximum mean
value over the three
phases
395 Meter-
CurrentAVG
AllMax
ETU unsigned
int
0
5019 0x139B Maximum current in
neutral conductor
391 Meter-
Current-
NeutralMax
ETU unsigned
int
0
5020 0x139C Maximum current
which flows to
ground
393 Meter-
Current-
GroundMax
ETU unsigned
int
0
5021 0x139D Max. current over
the phases L1, L2
and L3
398 MeterCurrent
AllTimeMax
ETU unsigned
int
0
5022 0x139E Maximum long-time
mean value for
current
245 Meter-
Current-
DemandAVG
Max
ETU unsigned
int
0
5023 0x139F LOW Error in the COM21 — unsigned
char
—
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
236 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source VL Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5023 0x139F HIGH COM21 not
connected to the
ETU
COM21 unsigned
char
—
5024 0x13A0 Change bits - data
changed/updated
COM21 Format
(new)
—
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 237
8.8.2 Protection settings
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5041 0x13B1 Overload parameter
IR parameter set A
(PS A)
333 ParaIrA ETU Status byte 16 0
5042 0x13B2 Time-lag class tR PS
A
335 ParatrA ETU unsigned int 16 –1
5043 0x13B3 Short-circuit
protection
instantaneous Ii PS
A
336 ParaIiA ETU unsigned int 16 1 / 0
(VL)
5044 0x13B4 Short-circuit
protection delayed
Isd PS A
337 ParaIsdA ETU unsigned int 16 1 / 0
(VL)
5045 0x13B5 Delay time for short-
circuit protection tsd
PS A
338 ParatsdA ETU unsigned int 16 –3
5046 0x13B6 LOW I2t characteristic for
delayed short-circuit
protection PS A
343 ParaSwitchI2t
dA
ETU unsigned int 1 —
5046 0x13B6 HIGH I2t characteristic for
ground-fault
protection PS A
344 ParaSwitchI2t
gA
ETU unsigned int 1 —
5047 0x13B7 Ground-fault
protection Ig PS A
339 ParaIgA ETU Format
(402)
16 0
5048 0x13B8 Delay time for
ground fault tg PS A
340 ParatgA ETU unsigned int 16 –3
5049 0x13B9 LOW Overload protection
neutral conductor IN
(VL)
365 ParaIN_VL ETU Format
(373)
8 0
5049 0x13B9 HIGH ZSI on/off 421 ParaZSS-
Enable
ETU unsigned ch
ar
8 —
5050 0x13BA LOW Time lag class
(SENTRON VL
LCD ETU40M only)
331 ParaTrip-
Class
ETU unsigned ch
ar
8 0
5050 0x13BA HIGH Current unbalance 139 ParaUnsym-
Current
ETU Format
(307)
8 0
5051 0x13BB LOW N transformer
connected
411 EnvNeutral-
Sensor
ETU unsigned ch
ar
1 —
5051 0x13BB HIGH Thermal memory
PS A
346 ParaSwitch-
thermA
ETU unsigned ch
ar
1 —
5052 0x13BC LOW Property byte
(overload pre-alarm
(VL only))
369 ParaPreAlarm LCD
ETU
Format
(328)
8 —
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
238 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5052 0x13BC HIGH Property byte (short-
circuit protection
delayed Isd PS A)
337 ParaIsdA LCD
ETU
Format
(401)
8 —
5053 0x13BD Overload pre-alarm
(VL only)
369 ParaPreAlarm LCD
ETU
Format
(373)
16 0
5054 0x13BE LOW Ground fault
transformer
detection type
410 EnvGround-
Sensor
LCD
ETU
Format
(410)
8 —
5055 0x13BF LOW Activation (short-
circuit protection
instantaneous Ii PS
A)
LCD
ETU
boolean 8 —
5055 0x13BF HIGH Activation (ground-
fault alarm Ig2 PS A)
LCD
ETU
boolean 8 —
5056 0x13C0 Ground fault alarm
Ig2 PS A
341 ParaIg2A LCD
ETU
unsigned int 160
5057 0x13C1 Delay time for
ground fault alarm
tg2 PS A
342 Paratg2A LCD
ETU
unsigned int 16 –3
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 239
8.8.3 Diagnostics/counters
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5061 0x13C5 Number of short-
circuit trips (SI)
104 DiagCounterSh
ortCircuit
COM21 unsigned
int
16 0
5062 0x13C6 Reserved — unsigned c
har
16 —
5063 0x13C7 Number of overload
trips (L)
105 DiagCounterOv
erload
COM21 unsigned
int
16 0
5064 0x13C8 Number of ground-
fault tripping
operations (G)
106 DiagCounterGr
oundFault
COM21 unsigned
int
16 0
5065 0x13C9 Number of
switching
operations caused
by trips
81 DiagCount-
GearTrip
COM21 unsigned
int
16 0
5066 0x13CA Runtime meter
(when On + current
> 0)
83 DiagHour-
Metering
COM21 unsigned
long
1 0
5068 0x13CC tbd. — — unsigned
int
1 0
5069 0x13CD tbd. — — unsigned
int
16 0
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
240 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.8.4 Configuration
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5081 0x13D9 Circuit breaker frame 378 EnvLab-
FrameOr-
SensorRating
ETU unsigned
int
16 0
5082 0x13DA Rating plug 377 EnvRatingPlug ETU unsigned
int
16 0
5083 0x13DB LOW Type of trip unit 412 EnvTripUnit-
Name
ETU Format
(412)
5 —
5083 0x13DB HIGH Ground fault enabled 438 ParaGFEnable ETU 1 —
5084 0x13DC Reserved — unsigned c
har
16 —
5085 0x13DD LOW Number of poles of
circuit breaker
108 EnvPol ETU Format
(108)
3 —
5085 0x13DD HIGH Reserved — unsigned c
har
8 —
5086 0x13DE tbd. 439 — — unsigned
int
16 0
5087 0x13DF LOW Market in which the
trip unit is used
95 EnvMarket-
CircuitBreaker
ETU Format
(95)
2 —
5087 0x13DF HIGH Ground fault
transformer detection
type
410 EnvGround-
Sensor
ETU Format
(410)
2 —
8.8.5 Trip log
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5101 0x13ED Trip log of the last 5
tripping operations with
time
15 DiagTripLog COM21 Format
(15)
480 —
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 241
8.8.6 Commands
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5141 0x1415 LOW Controls the
commands/functions
(e.g. delete/reset
min./max. values) of
the communication
module
18 ControlComBox COM21 Format
(18)
8 —
5141 0x1415 HIGH Controls the outputs
of the communication
module (e.g.
switching the
breaker)
19 ControlInOutCo
mBox
COM21 Format
(19)
8 —
5142 0x1416 Controls the trip unit 406 ControlTripUnit ETU Format
(406)
16 —
5143 0x1417 LOW tbd. 420 — — unsigne
d char
8 —
5143 0x1417 HIGH ZSI on/off 421 ParaZSIEnable ETU Format
(421)
8 —
5144 0x1418 LOW Active parameter set 370 ControlSwitch-
ParaSet
ETU Format
(370)
1 —
5144 0x1418 HIGH Reserved unsigne
d char
8 —
5145 0x1419 LOW tbd. — tbd. 8 —
5145 0x1415 HIGH tbd. COM21 tbd. 8 —
Data library
8.8 SENTRON 3VL data areas
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
242 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.8.7 Settings and status of the communication module
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5161 0x1429 LOW MODBUS address 5 ParaCom-
Address
COM21 unsigned
char
8 0
5161 0x1429 HIGH Reserved — unsigned
char
8 —
5162 0x142A LOW MODBUS
transmission rate
(baud rate)
427 ParaCom-
Baudrate
COM21 Format
(427)
8 —
5162 0x142A HIGH Parity 428 ParaComParity COM21 Format
(428)
8 —
5163 0x142B System time of the
circuit breaker
90 Control-
SystemTime
COM21 Time 64 —
5167 0x142F LOW tbd. — — — unsigned
char
3 —
5167 0x142F HIGH MODBUS write
protection
(DPWriteEnable)
14 ControlEnable-
DPWrite
COM21 Format
(14)
1 —
5168 0x1430 LOW Basic type of
MODBUS data
transfer
6 ParaCom-
BasisTyp
COM21 Hex 2 —
5168 0x1430 HIGH Reserved — unsigned
char
8 —
5169 0x1431 Data in the cyclic
profile of MODBUS
7 ParaCycleData COM21 Format
(7)
224 —
5183 0x143F LOW Status of the
connected MODBUS
17 StatusDPBus COM21 Format
(17)
3 —
5183 0x143F HIGH Reserved — unsigned
char
8 —
8.8.8 Description of the communication module
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5201 0x1451 User text (freely
editable)
20 EnvUserText COM21 64 x char 512 —
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 243
8.8.9 ETU identification
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5241 0x1479 Identification number
of trip unit
409 EnvIdentTripUni
t
ETU 17 x cha 136 —
5249 0x1481 Hardware/software
version 3VL
423 EnvHardSoft3V
L
ETU 16 x cha
r
128 —
8.8.10 Identification of the communication module
Register
Address
dec hex
High/L
ow
Description Data
point
Mnemonic Source
VL
Format Length
(bits)
Scaling
5261 0x148D Identification number
of the
COM16/COM21
91 EnvIdent-
ComBox
COM21 16 x cha
r
128 —
5269 0x1495 tbd. 92 EnvHardSoftCo
mBox
COM21 16 x cha
r
128 —
8.9 Formats
8.9.1 Formats of the data points
The different formats of the data points are described in this section. This includes the
description of the Motorola format used, e.g. "int" and "unsigned int", as well as, above all,
the description of special formats. A special format is, for example, the binary breakdown of
the data point that specifies the last tripping operation.
All available data points and the register block in which they are transferred over
Modbus RTU have been described on the preceding pages. In the "Format" column, an
explanation is given of which data type is referred to and how this content is to be
interpreted. A distinction must be made here between generally valid formats and special
formats that are usually binary coded.
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
244 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.9.2 General data formats
Many data points have a data length of more than one byte. In this case, the numbers can
be stored either in Little-Endian- format (Intel) or in Big-Endian- format (Motorola) depending
on the processor type for which the format has been developed. In Big-Endian format, the
higher-order byte is before the lower-order byte to facilitate reading, and with Intel, the bytes
are in the opposite order.
The table below shows the standard formats used, with their value ranges and purposes.
Table 8- 36 Standard data formats
Format Length in byte Signs Value range
unscaled
Used for ...
unsigned int 2 — 0 ... 65535 Measured values,
parameters, etc.
signed int 2 ✓ – 32678 ... 32767 Negative measured
values
unsigned char 1 — 0 ... 255 Measured values,
parameters with lower
value range
char 1 — 0 ... 255 ASCII characters
unsigned long 4 — 0 ... 4294967295 Measured values and
maintenance
information with a
large measuring range
In general, all data communicated over Modbus RTU is transferred in the Motorola
(Big-Endian) format.
Format "unsigned int"
The format "unsigned int" is used primarily for transferring parameters and measured values,
as well as statistical information. If the value range is insufficient, scaling is used.
To transfer measured values that can also be negative (e.g. power factors), the format
"signed int" is used.
Format "unsigned char"
If the value range of a parameter or measured value is severely restricted (e.g. phase
unbalance of 0 to 50%), the data type "unsigned char" is sufficient.
Text elements consisting of ASCII characters are assembled using the data type "char". In
this case, the data type "unsigned char" indicates a "byte" that can assume a value from the
range 0 to 255.
Format "unsigned long"
If the value range is insufficient, the data type "unsigned long" is fallen back on. This is used,
for example, with the runtime meter. If "unsigned int" were to be used for this, the runtime
meter would overflow after seven-and-a-half years.
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 245
Format "hex"
The format "hex" is always used where there is a concatenation of binary information, e.g.
when transferring the statuses at the inputs of the binary input module. However, it is also
used when hexadecimal numbers are transferred.
Format of the property byte
Chapter Cyclic data (Page 234) contains the description of the format of the property byte
PB.
Time format
The S7-compatible time format (DATE_AND_TIME) is used for communicating time stamps.
The time stamp in RB100 is represented according to the PROFIBUS standard and is an
exception to this rule.
Table 8- 37 Format time
Byte Bit Meaning
0 — Year
1 — Month
2 — Day
3 — Hour
4 — Minute
5 — Seconds
6 — Low-order digits of milliseconds
7 4 - 7 Higher-order digits of milliseconds (4MSB)
7 0 - 3 Weekday (1 =Sunday, ..., 7 = Saturday)
All time stamps are transferred in this format
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
246 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Table 8- 38 PROFIBUS time format
Byte Bit Meaning
0 — Higher-order digits of milliseconds
1 — Low-order digits of milliseconds
2 — Minute
3 0 - 4 Hour
3 7 1 = Summertime; 0 = Wintertime
4 0 - 4 Day of the month (1 ... 31)
4 5 - 7 Weekday (1 = Monday, ..., 7 = Sunday)
5 — Month
6 — Year (02 = 2002)
7 — Reserved
This time format is compliant with the PROFIBUS time format.
8.9.3 Special data formats
Special data formats are used where the inflexible standard formats cannot be used. The
special data formats are used, for example, with binary-coded or complex data points. If a
special data format has been used with a data point, this is indicated in the first and second
part of this chapter in the format column with Format (X). The X represents a consecutive
number of the special data formats used, described below. In the majority of cases, the X in
the format agrees with the data point number to simplify the search.
In the case of bit interpretations, the meaning is always to be seen with a high-active signal.
The table below shows the format (7) for the data in the cyclic profile of Modbus.
Table 8- 39 Format (7) cyclic data in DP
Byte Meaning
0 Assignment (data point number) of the 1st data block in the cyclic message frame
2 Assignment (data point number) of the 2nd data block in the cyclic message frame
4 Assignment (data point number) of the 3rd data block in the cyclic message frame
6 Assignment (data point number) of the 4th data block in the cyclic message frame
8 Assignment (data point number) of the 5th data block in the cyclic message frame
10 Assignment (data point number) of the 6th data block in the cyclic message frame
12 Assignment (data point number) of the 7th data block in the cyclic message frame
14 Assignment (data point number) of the 8th data block in the cyclic message frame
16 Assignment (data point number) of the 9th data block in the cyclic message frame
18 Assignment (data point number) of the 10th data block in the cyclic message frame
20 Assignment (data point number) of the 11th data block in the cyclic message frame
22 Assignment (data point number) of the 12th data block in the cyclic message frame
24 Assignment (data point number) of the 13th data block in the cyclic message frame
26 Assignment (data point number) of the 14th data block in the cyclic message frame
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 247
The table below shows the format (10) for the IP addresses that consist of four digits from
0 to 255 each separated by a dot, e.g. 192.168.121.101.
Table 8- 40 Format (10) IP address BDA PLUS
Byte Meaning
0 1. sub-IP address X._._._
1 2. sub-IP address _.X._._
2 3. sub-IP address _._.X.__
3 4. sub-IP address _._._.X
4 Reserved
The table below shows the format (14) for write protection. The write protection can be
deactivated using a hardware input on COM16 or COM 21.
Table 8- 41 Format (14) write protection
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 0 = write protection active; 1 = write protection inactive
8.9.4 Data formats 15 to 24
The table below shows the format (15) "trip log". It contains the last 5 tripping operations with
time stamp and source.
Table 8- 42 Format (15) "trip log"
Byte Bit Meaning
0-7 Time Time stamp of the 1st tripping operation
8 — Reserved 0x00
9 Reason for
tripping
operation
Reason for trip of 1st tripping operation
1 = overload
2 = instantaneous Short circuit
3 = delayed Short-circuit
4 = Ground fault
5 = Ext. protection function
6 = Overload N-conductor
7 = ETU self-protection (analog override)
8 = Overtemperature
20 = Unbalance Current
21 = Unbalance Voltage
22 = Active power in normal dir.
23 = Active power in reverse dir.
24 = Overvoltage
25 = Undervoltage
26 = Overfrequency
27 = Underfrequency
28 = THD current
29 = THD voltage
30 = Change in phase dir. of rot.
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
248 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Byte Bit Meaning
10 — Source of 1st tripping operation
14 = Meter. function/M. PLUS
25 = Trip unit
11 — Reserved 0x00
12-19 — Time stamp of 2nd tripping operation
20 — Reserved 0x00
21 — Reason for 2nd tripping operation
22 — Source of 2nd tripping operation
23 — Reserved 0x00
24-31 — Time stamp of 3rd tripping operation
32 — Reserved 0x00
33 — Reason for 3rd tripping operation
34 — Source of 3rd tripping operation
35 — Reserved 0x00
36-43 — Time stamp of 4th tripping operation
44 — Reserved 0x00
45 — Reason for 4th tripping operation
46 — Source of 4th tripping operation
47 — Reserved 0x00
48-55 — Time stamp of 5th tripping operation
56 — Reserved 0x00
57 — Reason for 5th tripping operation
58 — Source of 5th tripping operation
59 — Reserved 0x00
The table below shows the format (16) "event log". It contains the last 10 events with time
stamp. Example, see below.
Table 8- 43 Format (16) "event log"
Byte Bit Meaning
0-7 — Time stamp of 1st event
8 — Reserved 0x00
Coming
"+"
Going
"-"
Event description
1 2 Overload warning
3 4 Overload warning N-conductor
5 6 Load shedding alarm
7 8 Load pick up message
9 10 Phase unbalance warning
11 12 Fault in trip unit
13 14 Ground fault warning
15 16 Overtemperature warning
9 —
20 — Switch on
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 249
Byte Bit Meaning
21 — Switch off
40 41 Threshold warning TV current
42 43 TV ground fault
44 45 TV overcurrent N-conductor
46 47 TV unbalance current
48 49 TV long-time mean value for current
50 51 TV undervoltage
52 53 TV unbalance voltage
54 55 TV overvoltage
56 57 TV long-time mean value for active power
58 59 TV long-time mean value for apparent power
60 61 TV long-time mean value for reactive power
62 63 TV reactive power in normal direction
64 65 TV reactive power in reverse direction
66 67 TV apparent power
68 69 TV overfrequency
70 71 TV underfrequency
72 73 TV under power factor
74 75 TV over power factor
76 77 TV THD current
78 79 TV THD voltage
80 81 TV peak factor
82 83 TV form factor
84 85 TV active power in normal direction
86 87 TV active power in reverse direction
10 — Source of 1st event
14 = Meter. function/M. PLUS
25 = Trip unit
11 — Reserved 0x00
12-19 — Time stamp of 2nd event
20 — Reserved 0x00
21 — 2. event
22 — Source of 2nd event
23 — Reserved 0x00
24-31 — Time stamp of 3rd event
32 — Reserved 0x00
33 — 3. event
34 — Source of 3rd event
35 — Reserved 0x00
36-43 — Time stamp of 4th event
44 — Reserved 0x00
45 — 4. event
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
250 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Byte Bit Meaning
46 — Source of 4th event
47 — Reserved 0x00
48-55 — Time stamp of 5th event
56 — Reserved 0x00
57 — 5. event
58 — Source of 5th event
59 — Reserved 0x00
60-67 — Time stamp of 6th event
68 — Reserved 0x00
69 — 6. event
70 — Source of 6th event
71 — Reserved 0x00
72-79 — Time stamp of 7th event
80 — Reserved 0x00
81 — 7. event
82 — Source of 7th event
83 — Reserved 0x00
84-91 — Time stamp of 8th event
92 — Reserved 0x00
93 — 8. event
94 — Source of 8th event
95 — Reserved 0x00
96-103 — Time stamp of 9th event
104 — Reserved 0x00
105 — 9. event
106 — Source of 9th event
107 — Reserved 0x00
108-115 — Time stamp of 10th event
116 — Reserved 0x00
117 — 10. event
118 — Source of 10th event
119 — Reserved 0x00
Table 8- 44 Event log, example (incomplete or extracts)
Date Time stamp event
06.06.08 14:19:58 - Threshold THD voltage
06.06.08 14:19:44 + Threshold THD voltage
06.06.08 14:19:24 - Threshold undervoltage
06.06.08 14:19:14 + Threshold undervoltage
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 251
The table below shows the format (17) "Status MODBUS RTU". The status can be used to
scan for a cyclic connection.
Table 8- 45 Format (17) "Status MODBUS RTU"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 0 = Communication active; 1 = Communication inactive
0 1 The communication module has no valid MODBUS RTU address
0 2 Modbus RTU address can no longer be changed
The table below shows the format (18) "Control communication module". Some settings of
the switch can be changed via this format.
Table 8- 46 Format (18) "Control communication module"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 2 Deletes the maintenance counters
0 3 Deletes the min./max. temperatures
0 4 Deletes all min./max. values except temperature
0 5 Synchronizes the clock to xx:30:00.000
0 6 Deletes the contents of the trip log and event log
The table below shows the format (19) "Control communication module outputs". The circuit
breaker can be switched on or off with this, for example.
Table 8- 47 Format (19) "Control communication module outputs"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 Set user output
0 1 Reset user output
0 2 Open circuit breaker
0 3 Close the circuit breaker
0 4 Switch user output mode to trip message 1
Status of user output mode 1
0 Trip is output
0 5
1 Actuation by user
0 6 Read status of user output
0 7 Read status of user input (COM16 only)
1 with firmware version V1.13.0 of the COM16 and higher. With previous versions, the bits are
always set to 0, and activation by the user is active.
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
252 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The table below shows the format (24) "position in frame". Data point 24 specifies the
position of the SENTRON WL in the guide frame.
Table 8- 48 Format (24) "Position in frame"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Disconnected position
0 1 Connected position
0 2 Test position
0 3 Switch not available
8.9.5 Data formats 88 to 162
The table below shows the format (88) "CubicleBUS modules" that contains the modules
connected on the CubicleBUS.
Table 8- 49 Format (88) "CubicleBUS modules"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 COM15
0 1 Trip unit ETU
0 2 ZSI module
1 0 Configurable digital output module
1 2 Digital output module #2
1 3 Digital input module #2
1 4 Breaker Status Sensor BSS
1 5 Digital output module #1
1 6 Digital input module #1
2 1 BDA PLUS
2 3 Graphic display ETU76B
2 4 Analog output module #2
2 5 Analog output module #1
2 6 Metering function or M. PLUS
The table below shows the format (95) "Market" specifying the market for which the circuit
breaker has been built and tested.
Table 8- 50 Format (95) "Market"
Byte Value Meaning
0 1 IEC
0 2 UL
0 3 ANSI
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 253
The table below shows the format (99) "Switching capacity class" that specifies the
maximum level of the breaking current.
Table 8- 51 Format (99) "Switching capacity class"
Byte Value Meaning
0 2 ECO switching capacity N/IntClassN
0 3 Standard switching capacity S/IntClassS
0 4 High switching capacity H/IntClassH
0 5 Extremely high switching capacity C/IntClassC
The table below shows the format (100) "Size". The size is determined by the rated switch
current and the switching capacity class.
Table 8- 52 Format (100) "Size"
Byte Value Meaning
0 1 Size 1
0 2 Size 2
0 3 Size 3
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
254 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The table below shows the format (103) "Order number LS", via which the switch can be
identified.
Table 8- 53 Format (103) "Order number LS"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 — 3
1 — W
2 — L
3 — Market
4 — Size
5/6 — Rated current
7 — Hyphen
8 — Switching capacity class
9 — Trip unit E = ETU45B without display, F = ETU45B with display,
J = ETU55B, N = ETU76B
10 — Trip unit supplement
B = without ground fault detection module
G = with ground fault detection module
11 — Number of poles
12 — Type of main connections
13 — Hyphen
14 — Drive
15 — 1st auxiliary trip unit
16 — 2nd auxiliary trip unit
17 — Auxiliary current switch
18 0 Option F02
18 2 Option F04
18 3 Option F05
18 6 Option F01
18 7 Options F20 to F22
19 0 Option K01
19 1 Option K10 to K13
The table below shows the format (107) "switched-off I2t values" that contains the total of
switched-off I2t values per phase in the format "unsigned long".
Table 8- 54 Format (107) "Switched-off I2t values"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 — Phase L1 (unsigned long)
4 — Phase L2 (unsigned long)
8 — Phase L3 (unsigned long)
12 — Phase N (unsigned long)
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 255
The table below shows the format (108) "Number of poles" that specifies the number of
protected poles for the main circuit.
Table 8- 55 Format (108) "Number of poles"
Byte Value Meaning
0 1 3-pole
0 2 4-pole (with N-conductor)
The table below shows the format (111) "Switch position DI" that also distinguishes the
switch position of the digital input module between Module 1 and 2.
Table 8- 56 Format (111) "Switch position DI"
Byte Value Meaning
0 1 Parameter set switching (Module #1)
0 2 6 x digital inputs (Module #2)
The table below shows the format (119) "Switch position DO" that specifies which output
block is selected with which delay.
Table 8- 57 Format (119) "Switch position DO"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0x01 Module #1 trip instantaneous
0 0x02 Module #1 trip delayed 200 ms
0 0x03 Module #1 trip delayed 500 ms
0 0x04 Module #1 trip delayed 1 s
0 0x05 Module #1 trip delayed 2 s
0 0x06 Module #2 alarm instantaneous
0 0x07 Module #2 alarm delayed 200 ms
0 0x08 Module #2 alarm delayed 500 ms
0 0x09 Module #2 alarm delayed 1 s
0 0x0A Module #2 alarm delayed 2 s
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
256 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The table below shows the format (121) "Control DO outputs" for controlling the outputs of
the digital output modules with rotary coding switches.
Table 8- 58 Format (121) "Control DO outputs"
Byte Value Meaning
0 No action
1 Set output 1 ("1")
2 Reset output 1 ("0")
3 Set output 2 ("1")
4 Reset output 2 ("0")
5 Set output 3 ("1")
6 Reset output 3 ("0")
7 Set output 4 ("1")
8 Reset output 4 ("0")
9 Set output 5 ("1")
10 Reset output 5 ("0")
11 Set output 6 ("1")
12 Reset output 6 ("0")
0
13 Switch force mode off (overwriting of the actually valid data)
The table below shows the format (129) "Configurable output module". Event 1 of the 1st
output provides an example of the assignment for all others.
Table 8- 59 Format (129) "Configurable output module"
Byte Value Meaning
0 — 1st event at the 1st output
1 — 2nd event at the 1st output
2 — 3rd event at the 1st output
3 — 4th event at the 1st output
4 — 5th event at the 1st output
5 — 6th event at the 1st output
6 — 1st event at the 2nd output
7 — 2nd event at the 2nd output
8 — 3rd event at the 2nd output
9 — 4th event at the 2nd output
10 — 5th event at the 2nd output
11 — 6th event at the 2nd output
12 — 1st event at the 3rd output
13 — 2nd event at the 3rd output
14 — 3rd event at the 3rd output
15 — 4th event at the 3rd output
16 — 5th event at the 3rd output
17 — 6th event at the 3rd output
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 257
Byte Value Meaning
18 — Event at the 4th output
19 — Event at the 5th output
20 — Event at the 6th output
0 0x00 Not assigned
0 0x01 Switch on
0 0x02 Switch off
0 0x03 Spring energy store compressed
0 0x04 Ready for switching on
0 0x05 General warning
0 0x06 Group tripped signal
0 0x07 Write protection active
0 0x08 Communications OK
0 0x3A Trigger event A occurred
0 0x3B Trigger event B occurred
0 0x3C Parameter set A active
0 0x3D Parameter set B active
0 0x3E Communication bit 1 (#426)
0 0x3F Communication bit 2 (#426)
0 0x40 Communication bit 3 (#426)
0 0x41 Communication bit 4 (#426)
0 0x42 Communication bit 5 (#426)
0 0x43 Communication bit 6 (#426)
0 0x3A Trigger event A occurred
0 0x3B Trigger event B occurred
0 0x3C Parameter set A active
Warning
0 0x09 Overload
0 0x0A Overload N-conductor
0 0x0B Load shedding
0 0x0C Ground fault
0 0x0D Overtemperature
0 0x0E µP-Error
0 0x0F Phase unbalance Current
0 0x10 Load pick up
Tripping operations
0 0x11 Overload L
0 0x12 Delayed short-circuit I
0 0x13 Instantaneous Short-circuit S
0 0x15 Ground fault G
0 0x16 Overload N-conductor N
0 0x17 Phase unbalance current
0 0x18 Phase unbalance voltage
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
258 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Byte Value Meaning
0 0x19 Underfrequency
0 0x1A Overfrequency
0 0x1B Undervoltage
0 0x1C Overvoltage
0 0x1D Active power in normal direction
0 0x1E Active power in reverse direction
0 0x1F THD current
0 0x20 THD voltage
0 0x21 Reverse direction of rotation of phase
Threshold
0 0x22 Overcurrent
0 0x23 Overcurrent N-conductor
0 0x24 Overcurrent ground fault
0 0x25 Phase unbalance current
0 0x26 Phase unbalance voltage
0 0x27 Long-time av. Current
0 0x28 Undervoltage
0 0x29 Overvoltage
0 0x2A THD current
0 0x2B THD voltage
0 0x2C Peak factor
0 0x2D Form factor
0 0x2E Underfrequency
0 0x2F Overfrequency
0 0x30 Active power in normal direction
0 0x31 Active power in reverse direction
0 0x32 Apparent power
0 0x33 Reactive power in normal direction
0 0x34 Reactive power in reverse direction
0 0x35 cos φ capacitive
0 0x36 cos φ inductive
0 0x37 Long-time mean value of active power
0 0x38 Long-time mean value of reactive power
0 0x39 Long-time mean value of apparent power
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 259
The table below shows the format (138) "Type of the metering function". It specifies which
type of metering function is built in.
Table 8- 60 Format (138) "Type of the metering function"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0x00 No metering function
0 0x02 Metering function
0 0x03 Metering function PLUS
The table below shows the format (145) "Direction of incoming supply". The sign for active
power and reactive power depend on the "Direction of incoming supply".
Table 8- 61 Format (145) "Direction of incoming supply"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 From top to bottom
0 1 From bottom to top
The table below shows the format (146) "Direction of rotation of phase". The normal status of
the direction of rotation of the phase can be set using this.
Table 8- 62 Format (146) "Direction of rotation of phase"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Right (e.g. L1 – L2 – L3)
0 1 Left (e.g. L1 – L3 – L2 or similar)
The table below shows the format (162) "Voltage transformer". The setting of the primary
connection also influences the location of the measured voltage variables.
Table 8- 63 Format (162) "Voltage transformer"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 The voltage transformer is delta-connected on the primary side.
0 1 The voltage transformer is star-connected on the primary side.
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
260 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
8.9.6 Data formats 307 to 373
The table below shows the format (307) "Tripping of the metering function" that displays the
content of the last tripping operation by the extended protection function.
Table 8- 64 Format (307) "Tripping of the metering function"
Byte Value Meaning
0/1 0x0000 No tripping operation
0/1 0x0001 Phase unbalance current
0/1 0x0002 Phase unbalance voltage
0/1 0x0004 Active power in normal direction
0/1 0x0008 Active power in reverse direction
0/1 0x0040 Overvoltage
0/1 0x0080 Undervoltage
0/1 0x0100 Overfrequency
0/1 0x0200 Underfrequency
0/1 0x0400 THD current
0/1 0x0800 THD voltage
0/1 0x1000 Change of phase rotation
The table below shows the format (308) "Threshold warnings" that displays the currently
pending threshold warnings.
Table 8- 65 Format (308) "Threshold warnings"
Byte Bit Meaning
1 0 cos φ capacitive
1 1 cos φ inductive
1 2 THD current
1 3 THD voltage
1 4 Peak factor
1 5 Form factor
1 6 Active power in normal direction
1 7 Active power in reverse direction
2 0 Long-time mean value of active power
2 1 Long-time mean value of apparent power
2 2 Long-time mean value of reactive power
2 3 Reactive power in normal direction
2 4 Reactive power in reverse direction
2 5 Apparent power
2 6 Overfrequency
2 7 Underfrequency
3 0 Overcurrent
3 1 Overcurrent ground fault
3 2 Overcurrent N-conductor
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 261
Byte Bit Meaning
3 3 Phase unbalance current
3 4 Long-tirm mean value of current
3 5 Undervoltage
3 6 Phase unbalance voltage
3 7 Overvoltage
The table below shows the format (309) "Harmonic analysis". To calculate, the value must
be multiplied by the signed exponent.
Table 8- 66 Format (309) "Harmonic analysis"
Harmonic Byte Bit Meaning
0 — Harmonic current: Exponent (signed char)
1 — Harmonic current: Value (unsigned char)
2 — Harmonic voltage: Exponent (signed char)
1.
3 — Harmonic voltage: Value (unsigned char)
4 — Harmonic current: Exponent (signed char)
5 — Harmonic current: Value (unsigned char)
6 — Harmonic voltage: Exponent (signed char)
2.
7 — Harmonic voltage: Value (unsigned char)
3. - 28. 8 ... 111 — ...
112 — Harmonic current: Exponent (signed char)
113 — Harmonic current: Value (unsigned char)
114 — Harmonic voltage: Exponent (signed char)
29.
115 — Harmonic voltage: Value (unsigned char)
The table below shows the format (328) "Status of the switch" that transfers the data the
BSS has collected via a micro switch.
Table 8- 67 Format (328) "Status of the switch"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 Switch is off
0 1 Switch is on
0 2 Switch has tripped (tripped signaling switch)
0 3 Switch is ready
0 4 Spring energy store is compressed
0 5 Switch on 1st auxiliary trip unit actuated
0 6 Switch on 2nd auxiliary trip unit actuated
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
262 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The table below shows the format (331) Trip class (VL only). The value of the trip class is
adapted to the connected motor.
Table 8- 68 Format (331) "Trip class (VL only)"
Byte Value Meaning
0 5 3-second delay @ 7.2 x rated current
0 10 6-second delay @ 7.2 x rated current
0 15 9-second delay @ 7.2 x rated current
0 20 12-second delay @ 7.2 x rated current
0 30 18-second delay @ 7.2 x rated current
The table below shows the format (343) "I2t characteristic for S" via which the I2t
characteristic is switched on and off.
Table 8- 69 Format (343) "I2t characteristic for S"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 I2t characteristic for delayed short-circuit protection switched off.
0 1 I2t characteristic for delayed short-circuit protection switched on.
The table below shows the format (344) "I2t characteristic for G" via which the I2t
characteristic is switched on and off.
Table 8- 70 Format (344) "I2t characteristic for G"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 I2t characteristic for ground-fault protection switched off.
0 1 I2t characteristic for ground-fault protection switched on.
The table below shows the format (345) "I4t characteristic for L" via which the I4t
characteristic is switched on and off.
Table 8- 71 Format (345) "I4t characteristic for L"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 I4t characteristic for overload protection switched off.
0 1 I4t characteristic for overload protection switched on.
The table below shows the format (346) "Thermal memory" via which the thermal memory is
switched on and off.
Table 8- 72 Format (346) "Thermal memory"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Thermal memory switched off
0 1 Thermal memory switched on
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 263
The table below shows the format (347) "Phase loss sensitivity" via which the phase loss
sensitivity is switched on and off.
Table 8- 73 Format (347) "Phase loss sensitivity"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Phase loss sensitivity switched off
0 1 Phase loss sensitivity switched on
The table below shows the format (370) "Active parameter set" that specifies which of the
parameter sets is active.
Table 8- 74 Format (370) "Active parameter set"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Parameter set A active
0 1 Parameter set B active
The table below shows the format (373) "Phase number" that specifies the phase number of
the most loaded phase and the phase of the tripping operation.
Table 8- 75 Format (373) "Phase number"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Phase L1
0 1 Phase L2
0 2 Phase L3
0 3 N-conductor
0 4 Ground fault
8.9.7 Data formats 401 to 426
The table below shows the format (401) "Trip unit: tripping operations'", which shows the last
unacknowledged tripping operation of the trip unit.
Table 8- 76 Format (401) Trip unit: "tripping operations"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0x00 No tripping operation
0 0x01 Overload (L)
0 0x02 Instantaneous short circuit (I)
0 0x04 Short-time delayed short circuit (S)
0 0x08 Ground fault (G)
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
264 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
The table below shows the format (402) "Trip unit: alarms" via which the trip unit
communicates the currently pending alarms.
Table 8- 77 Format (402) Trip unit: "Alarms"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 Overload
0 1 Overload N-conductor
0 2 Load shedding
0 3 Load pick up
0 4 Phase unbalance current
0 5 Microprocessor fault
0 6 Ground fault
0 7 Overtemperature
1 0 Leading overload tripping alarm
1 1 Short-time mean value current
The table below shows format (405) "Contact status" that is calculated empirically from the
maintenance information.
Table 8- 78 Format (405) "Contact status"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 No maintenance necessary yet on main contacts
(Note: Despite this, the main contacts must be checked after every
tripping operation!)"
0 1 Perform immediate visual inspection on main contacts.
0 2 Prepare maintenance of the main contacts
The table below shows the format (406) "Control trip unit" via which the statistical information
can be reset, among other things.
Table 8- 79 Format (406) "Control trip unit"
Byte Value Meaning
0/1 0x0002 Delete last trip signal in trip unit
0/1 0x0022 Reset counter and statistical information of the trip unit
The table below shows the format (410) "Ground fault detection" with which the ground fault
detection method is set.
Table 8- 80 Format (410) "Ground fault detection"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 Detecting the current against ground via an external transformer
0 1 Calculation of the current against ground using vectorial summation
0 2 Detecting the current against ground using vectorial summation (alarm)
and an external transformer (tripping)
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 265
The table below shows format (411) "N transformer" that indicates whether an N transformer
is connected.
Table 8- 81 Format (411) "N transformer"
Byte Value Meaning
0 0 No transformer in the N-conductor
0 1 Transformer in the N-conductor
The table below shows the format (412) "'Trip unit type" that indicates which trip unit is used
and how it is equipped.
Table 8- 82 Format (412) "Trip unit type"
For 3WL
Byte Value IEC/UL Meaning
0 4 IEC ETU45B
0 5 IEC ETU45B with display
0 6 IEC ETU45B with ground fault
0 7 IEC ETU45B with display and ground fault
0 13 IEC ETU76B
0 14 IEC ETU76B with ground fault
0 17 UL ETU748
0 18 UL ETU748 with display
0 19 UL ETU748 with ground fault
0 20 UL ETU748 with display and ground protection
0 22 UL ETU776
0 23 UL ETU745
Data library
8.9 Formats
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
266 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Table 8- 83 Format (412) "Trip unit type"
For 3VL
Byte Value IEC/UL Meaning
0 15 IEC LCD ETU
0 16 IEC LCD ETU with motor protection
0 27 IEC ETU with "LI" protection
0 28 IEC ETU with "LS" protection
0 29 IEC ETU with motor protection and adjustable tripping class
0 30 UL ETU with "LI" protection
0 31 UL ETU with "LS" protection
0 32 UL ETU with motor protection
0 33 IEC LCD ETU with "LSI" protection and ground fault alarm
0 34 IEC ETU with motor protection and "I" protection
0 35 UL LCD ETU
0 37 UL LCD ETU with "LSI" protection and ground fault alarm
The table below shows the format (421) "Parameter ZSI".
Table 8- 84 Format (421) "Parameter ZSI"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 ZSI short-circuit active
0 1 ZSI ground fault active
0 2 Not used
0 3 Not used
0 ZSI switched off
1 ZSI input and output active
0 4/5
2 ZSI output active
0 6 Not used
0 7 Not used
The table below shows the format (426) "Communication bit" via which signals can be
triggered indirectly via the communication system and applied to the configurable output
module as a switching specification.
Table 8- 85 Format (426) "Communication bit"
Byte Bit Meaning
0 0 Communication bit 1
0 1 Communication bit 2
0 2 Communication bit 3
0 3 Communication bit 4
0 4 Communication bit 5
0 5 Communication bit 6
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 267
List of abbreviations A
A.1 List of abbreviations
The abbreviations used in the manual are explained below.
AC Alternating current
AWG American Wire Gauge
BDA PLUS Breaker Data Adapter PLUS
BSS Breaker Status Sensor
COM16 Communication module 3WL
COM11 Communication module 3VL
COM21 Communication module 3VL
CUB - CubicleBUS, connection "-"
CUB + CubicleBUS, connection "+"
DC Direct current
DIN German Industry Standard
ED ON time; exceeding the permissible ON time results in destruction
ESD Electrostatic sensitive device
ETU Electronic trip unit, solid-state overcurrent trip unit
EN European standard
EMC Electromagnetic compatibility
EXTEND. Extended protection function
F1 First shunt release
F2 Second shunt release
F3 Undervoltage release
F4 Undervoltage release with delay
F5 Tripping solenoid
F7 Remote reset solenoid
FIFO memory First in/first out memory
I/O In/Out, input and output module
I tripping operation Instantaneous short-circuit trip
ID Identification number
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
L1 Conductor/phase 1
L2 Conductor/phase 2
L3 Conductor/phase 3
LED Light emitting diode
LV Low-voltage
M Motor
List of abbreviations
A.1 List of abbreviations
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
268 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
MV Medium-high voltage
N Neutral conductor
NC Normally closed contact
S Normally open contact
S1 Signaling switch, switching position
S10 Electric ON
S12 Motor cutout switch
S13 Cutout switch for remote reset
S14 Cutout switch for shunt release F1 (overexcited)
S15 Cutout switch for switch-on solenoid Y1 (overexcited)
S22 Signaling switch on 1st auxiliary trip unit
S23 Signaling switch on 2nd auxiliary trip unit
S24 Tripped signaling switch
S42 Signaling switch on CubicleBUS side on first auxiliary trip unit F1
S43 Signaling switch on CubicleBUS side on second auxiliary trip unit F2, F3 or F4
S7 Signaling switch, switching position
S8 Signaling switch, switching position
ST Shunt release
T.U. ERROR Trip unit error, fault in overcurrent trip unit
TEST Test position
tsd Delay time for short time-delayed short-circuit protection
tZSI Guaranteed non-tripping time
UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
UVR Undervoltage release (instantaneous)
UVR td Undervoltage release (delayed)
VDE Association of German Electrical Engineers
VT Voltage transformer
X Terminal marking according to DIN
Y1 Switch-on solenoid
ZSI Zeitverkürzte Selektivitätssteuerung/Zone Selective Interlocking
You can find more abbreviations, especially with regard to possible settings, in the 3WL
Manual.
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 269
Glossary
3WL motorized operating mechanism
A geared motor automatically charges the stored-energy spring mechanism as soon as
voltage has been applied to the auxiliary supply connections. After one closing operation, the
stored-energy spring mechanism is automatically charged for the next closing operation.
Auxiliary trip unit
Undervoltage releases and shunt releases are available.
BSS module
Breaker Status Sensor - for collecting the information about the status of the circuit breaker
by means of signaling switch, and the transfer of this information to the CubicleBUS.
COM16 module
The communication module is the interface adapter for
● Converting the CubicleBUS signals to MODBUS signals and vice versa
● Provision of three isolated outputs for control functions (ON, OFF, 1x freely available)
● One input, freely usable for information from the switchgear
● Additional function when used as slide-in circuit breaker:
– Recording the position of the circuit breaker in the guide frame with the signaling
switches S46, S47 and S48.
CubicleBUS
3WL data bus system in the circuit breaker and in the vicinity of the circuit breaker with
interface (COM16) to the fieldbus (MODBUS RTU)
Energy transformer
Generates energy (power supply) for the internal supply of the overcurrent release.
Manual connector coding
The manual connectors can be coded to prevent the auxiliary conductor connections from
being connected incorrectly.
Glossary
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
270 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
Mechanical interlock
This function supports different types of mechanical interlocking for circuit breakers.
Position indicator
This indicates the position of the circuit breaker (disconnected/test/operating position) in the
guide frame.
Position signaling switch
This is used for remotely displaying the circuit breaker position in the guide frame.
Rated current coding
The rated current is coded in the factory, that is, each circuit breaker can only be used in a
guide frame with the same rated current.
Remote resetting
Using the optional remote reset solenoid, the electrical signal of the tripped signaling switch
and the reset button are reset.
Safe OFF
This additional function prevents the circuit breaker from closing and fulfills the isolation
condition in the OFF position to IEC 60947-2:
● "Mechanical OFF" button pressed
● Main contacts open
● Withdrawable circuit breakers: racking handle removed
● The various interlocking conditions are fulfilled
Shunt release (F1, F2)
For remotely opening the circuit breaker and blocking it against closing.
Switching position signaling switch
This auxiliary switch is actuated depending on the switching status of the circuit breaker.
Undervoltage release (delayed)
For remotely opening and interlocking the circuit breaker. Voltage dips must not cause the
circuit breaker to open.
Glossary
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 271
Undervoltage release (instantaneous/short-time delay)
For remotely opening and interlocking the circuit breaker as well as for using the circuit
breaker in EMERGENCY OFF circuits (to EN 60204-1 / DIN VDE 0113 Part 1) in conjunction
with a separate EMERGENCY OFF device. Brief voltage dips (td < 80 ms for instantaneous
undervoltage release, td < 200 ms for short-time delay undervoltage release) must not cause
the circuit breaker to open.
Glossary
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
272 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02 273
Index
"
"Parameters" view
powerconfig,
A
Accessories
SENTRON VL, 86
Analog output module
Calculation of full-scale value, 76
Interfaces, 74
Maximum assignment, 75
Measured value selection, 75
Technical data, 79
Test function, 79
B
Brief description
powerconfig, 147
C
COM21
Communication link ETU, 96
Connection of optional motorized operating
mechanism, 97
LED indicator, 102
Pin assignment, 95
Setting the MODBUS address, 94
Write protection, 96
Configuration
Digital output module, 71
CubicleBUS
Connection with COM16, 62
Connection without COM16, 61
Installation guidelines, 60
LED indicator, 63
Maximum configuration, 59
Power requirement SENTRON WL, 80
Selection of power supply, 82
Test input/output, 64
D
Data point, 157
Delay time
Rotary coding switch, 70
Delivery form
powerconfig, 148
Digital configurable output module
Technical data, 71
Digital input module, 66
Parameter set changeover, 67
Technical data, 68
Digital output module
Configuration, 71
LED indicator, 73
Output assignment, 72
Rotary coding switch, 68
Status detection, 72
Technical data, 70
Threshold delay, 72
F
Forcing, 64
Function overview
Overcurrent release, 89
VL160, 89
VL1600, 89
Function testing device
ZSI, 118
I
Internet download
powerconfig, 148
M
Metering function PLUS, 42
O
Offline mode
powerconfig, 149
Online mode
Index
3WL/3VL circuit breakers with communication capability - Modbus
274 System Manual, 07/2011, A5E02126891-02
powerconfig, 149
P
Pin assignment
X3, 59
powerconfig, 147
"Parameters" view,
Brief description, 147
Delivery form, 148
Internet download, 148
Offline mode, 149
Online mode, 149
Software requirements, 148
PROFIBUS data transfer
Integration of circuit breakers, 123
Protection functions
SENTRON VL, 88
R
Rotary coding switch, 67
Delay time, 58, 70
S
SENTRON VL
Accessories, 86
Brief description, 85
Overcurrent tripping systems, 88
Properties of the trip units, 88
Protection functions, 88
Software requirements
powerconfig, 148
T
Technical data
Analog output module, 79
Digital configurable output module, 71
Digital input module, 68
Digital output module, 70
Time selectivity, 105
W
Write protection
COM21, 96
Z
ZSI
3VL applications, 120
3VL COM20/COM21, 119
3VL configuration, 120
3VL connection, 120
3VL LED, 121
3WL application cases, 118
3WL connection, 118
Configuration, 118
Function testing device, 118
LED, 118
SENTRON 3WL, 117
Test function, 118
www.siemens.com/automation
Subject to change without prior notice
Order No.: A5E02126891-02
© Siemens AG 2011
Siemens AG
Industry Sector
Building Technologie Division
Postfach 10 09 53
93009 Regensburg
GERMANY
Service & Support
SENTRON
www.siemens.com/sentron
Download catalogs and information material:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/catalogs
Newsletter – always up to date:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/newsletter
E-business in the A&D Mall:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/mall
Online Support:
www.siemens.com/lowvoltage/support
Contact for all technical information:
Technical Assistance
e-Mail: support.automation@siemens.com
http://support.automation.siemens.com
